1 =encoding UTF-8
3 =head1 NAME
5 collectd.conf - Configuration for the system statistics collection daemon B<collectd>
7 =head1 SYNOPSIS
9 BaseDir "/var/lib/collectd"
10 PIDFile "/run/collectd.pid"
11 Interval 10.0
13 LoadPlugin cpu
14 LoadPlugin load
16 <LoadPlugin df>
17 Interval 3600
18 </LoadPlugin>
19 <Plugin df>
20 ValuesPercentage true
21 </Plugin>
23 LoadPlugin ping
24 <Plugin ping>
25 Host "example.org"
26 Host "provider.net"
27 </Plugin>
29 =head1 DESCRIPTION
31 This config file controls how the system statistics collection daemon
32 B<collectd> behaves. The most significant option is B<LoadPlugin>, which
33 controls which plugins to load. These plugins ultimately define collectd's
34 behavior. If the B<AutoLoadPlugin> option has been enabled, the explicit
35 B<LoadPlugin> lines may be omitted for all plugins with a configuration block,
36 i.e. a C<E<lt>PluginE<nbsp>...E<gt>> block.
38 The syntax of this config file is similar to the config file of the famous
39 I<Apache> webserver. Each line contains either an option (a key and a list of
40 one or more values) or a section-start or -end. Empty lines and everything
41 after a non-quoted hash-symbol (C<#>) are ignored. I<Keys> are unquoted
42 strings, consisting only of alphanumeric characters and the underscore (C<_>)
43 character. Keys are handled case insensitive by I<collectd> itself and all
44 plugins included with it. I<Values> can either be an I<unquoted string>, a
45 I<quoted string> (enclosed in double-quotes) a I<number> or a I<boolean>
46 expression. I<Unquoted strings> consist of only alphanumeric characters and
47 underscores (C<_>) and do not need to be quoted. I<Quoted strings> are
48 enclosed in double quotes (C<">). You can use the backslash character (C<\>)
49 to include double quotes as part of the string. I<Numbers> can be specified in
50 decimal and floating point format (using a dot C<.> as decimal separator),
51 hexadecimal when using the C<0x> prefix and octal with a leading zero (C<0>).
52 I<Boolean> values are either B<true> or B<false>.
54 Lines may be wrapped by using C<\> as the last character before the newline.
55 This allows long lines to be split into multiple lines. Quoted strings may be
56 wrapped as well. However, those are treated special in that whitespace at the
57 beginning of the following lines will be ignored, which allows for nicely
58 indenting the wrapped lines.
60 The configuration is read and processed in order, i.e. from top to bottom. So
61 the plugins are loaded in the order listed in this config file. It is a good
62 idea to load any logging plugins first in order to catch messages from plugins
63 during configuration. Also, unless B<AutoLoadPlugin> is enabled, the
64 B<LoadPlugin> option I<must> occur I<before> the appropriate
65 C<E<lt>B<Plugin> ...E<gt>> block.
67 =head1 GLOBAL OPTIONS
69 =over 4
71 =item B<BaseDir> I<Directory>
73 Sets the base directory. This is the directory beneath which all RRD-files are
74 created. Possibly more subdirectories are created. This is also the working
75 directory for the daemon.
77 =item B<LoadPlugin> I<Plugin>
79 Loads the plugin I<Plugin>. This is required to load plugins, unless the
80 B<AutoLoadPlugin> option is enabled (see below). Without any loaded plugins,
81 I<collectd> will be mostly useless.
83 Only the first B<LoadPlugin> statement or block for a given plugin name has any
84 effect. This is useful when you want to split up the configuration into smaller
85 files and want each file to be "self contained", i.e. it contains a B<Plugin>
86 block I<and> the appropriate B<LoadPlugin> statement. The downside is that if
87 you have multiple conflicting B<LoadPlugin> blocks, e.g. when they specify
88 different intervals, only one of them (the first one encountered) will take
89 effect and all others will be silently ignored.
91 B<LoadPlugin> may either be a simple configuration I<statement> or a I<block>
92 with additional options, affecting the behavior of B<LoadPlugin>. A simple
93 statement looks like this:
95 LoadPlugin "cpu"
97 Options inside a B<LoadPlugin> block can override default settings and
98 influence the way plugins are loaded, e.g.:
100 <LoadPlugin perl>
101 Interval 60
102 </LoadPlugin>
104 The following options are valid inside B<LoadPlugin> blocks:
106 =over 4
108 =item B<Globals> B<true|false>
110 If enabled, collectd will export all global symbols of the plugin (and of all
111 libraries loaded as dependencies of the plugin) and, thus, makes those symbols
112 available for resolving unresolved symbols in subsequently loaded plugins if
113 that is supported by your system.
115 This is useful (or possibly even required), e.g., when loading a plugin that
116 embeds some scripting language into the daemon (e.g. the I<Perl> and
117 I<Python plugins>). Scripting languages usually provide means to load
118 extensions written in C. Those extensions require symbols provided by the
119 interpreter, which is loaded as a dependency of the respective collectd plugin.
120 See the documentation of those plugins (e.g., L<collectd-perl(5)> or
121 L<collectd-python(5)>) for details.
123 By default, this is disabled. As a special exception, if the plugin name is
124 either C<perl> or C<python>, the default is changed to enabled in order to keep
125 the average user from ever having to deal with this low level linking stuff.
127 =item B<Interval> I<Seconds>
129 Sets a plugin-specific interval for collecting metrics. This overrides the
130 global B<Interval> setting. If a plugin provides its own support for specifying
131 an interval, that setting will take precedence.
133 =item B<FlushInterval> I<Seconds>
135 Specifies the interval, in seconds, to call the flush callback if it's
136 defined in this plugin. By default, this is disabled.
138 =item B<FlushTimeout> I<Seconds>
140 Specifies the value of the timeout argument of the flush callback.
142 =back
144 =item B<AutoLoadPlugin> B<false>|B<true>
146 When set to B<false> (the default), each plugin needs to be loaded explicitly,
147 using the B<LoadPlugin> statement documented above. If a
148 B<E<lt>PluginE<nbsp>...E<gt>> block is encountered and no configuration
149 handling callback for this plugin has been registered, a warning is logged and
150 the block is ignored.
152 When set to B<true>, explicit B<LoadPlugin> statements are not required. Each
153 B<E<lt>PluginE<nbsp>...E<gt>> block acts as if it was immediately preceded by a
154 B<LoadPlugin> statement. B<LoadPlugin> statements are still required for
155 plugins that don't provide any configuration, e.g. the I<Load plugin>.
157 =item B<CollectInternalStats> B<false>|B<true>
159 When set to B<true>, various statistics about the I<collectd> daemon will be
160 collected, with "collectd" as the I<plugin name>. Defaults to B<false>.
162 The following metrics are reported:
164 =over 4
166 =item C<collectd-write_queue/queue_length>
168 The number of metrics currently in the write queue. You can limit the queue
169 length with the B<WriteQueueLimitLow> and B<WriteQueueLimitHigh> options.
171 =item C<collectd-write_queue/derive-dropped>
173 The number of metrics dropped due to a queue length limitation.
174 If this value is non-zero, your system can't handle all incoming metrics and
175 protects itself against overload by dropping metrics.
177 =item C<collectd-cache/cache_size>
179 The number of elements in the metric cache (the cache you can interact with
180 using L<collectd-unixsock(5)>).
182 =back
184 =item B<Include> I<Path> [I<pattern>]
186 If I<Path> points to a file, includes that file. If I<Path> points to a
187 directory, recursively includes all files within that directory and its
188 subdirectories. If the C<wordexp> function is available on your system,
189 shell-like wildcards are expanded before files are included. This means you can
190 use statements like the following:
192 Include "/etc/collectd.d/*.conf"
194 Starting with version 5.3, this may also be a block in which further options
195 affecting the behavior of B<Include> may be specified. The following option is
196 currently allowed:
198 <Include "/etc/collectd.d">
199 Filter "*.conf"
200 </Include>
202 =over 4
204 =item B<Filter> I<pattern>
206 If the C<fnmatch> function is available on your system, a shell-like wildcard
207 I<pattern> may be specified to filter which files to include. This may be used
208 in combination with recursively including a directory to easily be able to
209 arbitrarily mix configuration files and other documents (e.g. README files).
210 The given example is similar to the first example above but includes all files
211 matching C<*.conf> in any subdirectory of C</etc/collectd.d>:
213 Include "/etc/collectd.d" "*.conf"
215 =back
217 If more than one file is included by a single B<Include> option, the files
218 will be included in lexicographical order (as defined by the C<strcmp>
219 function). Thus, you can e.E<nbsp>g. use numbered prefixes to specify the
220 order in which the files are loaded.
222 To prevent loops and shooting yourself in the foot in interesting ways the
223 nesting is limited to a depth of 8E<nbsp>levels, which should be sufficient for
224 most uses. Since symlinks are followed it is still possible to crash the daemon
225 by looping symlinks. In our opinion significant stupidity should result in an
226 appropriate amount of pain.
228 It is no problem to have a block like C<E<lt>Plugin fooE<gt>> in more than one
229 file, but you cannot include files from within blocks.
231 =item B<PIDFile> I<File>
233 Sets where to write the PID file to. This file is overwritten when it exists
234 and deleted when the program is stopped. Some init-scripts might override this
235 setting using the B<-P> command-line option.
237 =item B<PluginDir> I<Directory>
239 Path to the plugins (shared objects) of collectd.
241 =item B<TypesDB> I<File> [I<File> ...]
243 Set one or more files that contain the data-set descriptions. See
244 L<types.db(5)> for a description of the format of this file.
246 =item B<Interval> I<Seconds>
248 Configures the interval in which to query the read plugins. Obviously smaller
249 values lead to a higher system load produced by collectd, while higher values
250 lead to more coarse statistics.
252 B<Warning:> You should set this once and then never touch it again. If you do,
253 I<you will have to delete all your RRD files> or know some serious RRDtool
254 magic! (Assuming you're using the I<RRDtool> or I<RRDCacheD> plugin.)
256 =item B<MaxReadInterval> I<Seconds>
258 A read plugin doubles the interval between queries after each failed attempt
259 to get data.
261 This options limits the maximum value of the interval. The default value is
262 B<86400>.
264 =item B<Timeout> I<Iterations>
266 Consider a value list "missing" when no update has been read or received for
267 I<Iterations> iterations. By default, I<collectd> considers a value list
268 missing when no update has been received for twice the update interval. Since
269 this setting uses iterations, the maximum allowed time without update depends
270 on the I<Interval> information contained in each value list. This is used in
271 the I<Threshold> configuration to dispatch notifications about missing values,
272 see L<collectd-threshold(5)> for details.
274 =item B<ReadThreads> I<Num>
276 Number of threads to start for reading plugins. The default value is B<5>, but
277 you may want to increase this if you have more than five plugins that take a
278 long time to read. Mostly those are plugins that do network-IO. Setting this to
279 a value higher than the number of registered read callbacks is not recommended.
281 =item B<WriteThreads> I<Num>
283 Number of threads to start for dispatching value lists to write plugins. The
284 default value is B<5>, but you may want to increase this if you have more than
285 five plugins that may take relatively long to write to.
287 =item B<WriteQueueLimitHigh> I<HighNum>
289 =item B<WriteQueueLimitLow> I<LowNum>
291 Metrics are read by the I<read threads> and then put into a queue to be handled
292 by the I<write threads>. If one of the I<write plugins> is slow (e.g. network
293 timeouts, I/O saturation of the disk) this queue will grow. In order to avoid
294 running into memory issues in such a case, you can limit the size of this
295 queue.
297 By default, there is no limit and memory may grow indefinitely. This is most
298 likely not an issue for clients, i.e. instances that only handle the local
299 metrics. For servers it is recommended to set this to a non-zero value, though.
301 You can set the limits using B<WriteQueueLimitHigh> and B<WriteQueueLimitLow>.
302 Each of them takes a numerical argument which is the number of metrics in the
303 queue. If there are I<HighNum> metrics in the queue, any new metrics I<will> be
304 dropped. If there are less than I<LowNum> metrics in the queue, all new metrics
305 I<will> be enqueued. If the number of metrics currently in the queue is between
306 I<LowNum> and I<HighNum>, the metric is dropped with a probability that is
307 proportional to the number of metrics in the queue (i.e. it increases linearly
308 until it reaches 100%.)
310 If B<WriteQueueLimitHigh> is set to non-zero and B<WriteQueueLimitLow> is
311 unset, the latter will default to half of B<WriteQueueLimitHigh>.
313 If you do not want to randomly drop values when the queue size is between
314 I<LowNum> and I<HighNum>, set B<WriteQueueLimitHigh> and B<WriteQueueLimitLow>
315 to the same value.
317 Enabling the B<CollectInternalStats> option is of great help to figure out the
318 values to set B<WriteQueueLimitHigh> and B<WriteQueueLimitLow> to.
320 =item B<Hostname> I<Name>
322 Sets the hostname that identifies a host. If you omit this setting, the
323 hostname will be determined using the L<gethostname(2)> system call.
325 =item B<FQDNLookup> B<true|false>
327 If B<Hostname> is determined automatically this setting controls whether or not
328 the daemon should try to figure out the "fully qualified domain name", FQDN.
329 This is done using a lookup of the name returned by C<gethostname>. This option
330 is enabled by default.
332 =item B<PreCacheChain> I<ChainName>
334 =item B<PostCacheChain> I<ChainName>
336 Configure the name of the "pre-cache chain" and the "post-cache chain". Please
337 see L<FILTER CONFIGURATION> below on information on chains and how these
338 setting change the daemon's behavior.
340 =back
342 =head1 PLUGIN OPTIONS
344 Some plugins may register own options. These options must be enclosed in a
345 C<Plugin>-Section. Which options exist depends on the plugin used. Some plugins
346 require external configuration, too. The C<apache plugin>, for example,
347 required C<mod_status> to be configured in the webserver you're going to
348 collect data from. These plugins are listed below as well, even if they don't
349 require any configuration within collectd's configuration file.
351 A list of all plugins and a short summary for each plugin can be found in the
352 F<README> file shipped with the sourcecode and hopefully binary packets as
353 well.
355 =head2 Plugin C<aggregation>
357 The I<Aggregation plugin> makes it possible to aggregate several values into
358 one using aggregation functions such as I<sum>, I<average>, I<min> and I<max>.
359 This can be put to a wide variety of uses, e.g. average and total CPU
360 statistics for your entire fleet.
362 The grouping is powerful but, as with many powerful tools, may be a bit
363 difficult to wrap your head around. The grouping will therefore be
364 demonstrated using an example: The average and sum of the CPU usage across
365 all CPUs of each host is to be calculated.
367 To select all the affected values for our example, set C<Plugin cpu> and
368 C<Type cpu>. The other values are left unspecified, meaning "all values". The
369 I<Host>, I<Plugin>, I<PluginInstance>, I<Type> and I<TypeInstance> options
370 work as if they were specified in the C<WHERE> clause of an C<SELECT> SQL
371 statement.
373 Plugin "cpu"
374 Type "cpu"
376 Although the I<Host>, I<PluginInstance> (CPU number, i.e. 0, 1, 2, ...) and
377 I<TypeInstance> (idle, user, system, ...) fields are left unspecified in the
378 example, the intention is to have a new value for each host / type instance
379 pair. This is achieved by "grouping" the values using the C<GroupBy> option.
380 It can be specified multiple times to group by more than one field.
382 GroupBy "Host"
383 GroupBy "TypeInstance"
385 We do neither specify nor group by I<plugin instance> (the CPU number), so all
386 metrics that differ in the CPU number only will be aggregated. Each
387 aggregation needs I<at least one> such field, otherwise no aggregation would
388 take place.
390 The full example configuration looks like this:
392 <Plugin "aggregation">
393 <Aggregation>
394 Plugin "cpu"
395 Type "cpu"
397 GroupBy "Host"
398 GroupBy "TypeInstance"
400 CalculateSum true
401 CalculateAverage true
402 </Aggregation>
403 </Plugin>
405 There are a couple of limitations you should be aware of:
407 =over 4
409 =item
411 The I<Type> cannot be left unspecified, because it is not reasonable to add
412 apples to oranges. Also, the internal lookup structure won't work if you try
413 to group by type.
415 =item
417 There must be at least one unspecified, ungrouped field. Otherwise nothing
418 will be aggregated.
420 =back
422 As you can see in the example above, each aggregation has its own
423 B<Aggregation> block. You can have multiple aggregation blocks and aggregation
424 blocks may match the same values, i.e. one value list can update multiple
425 aggregations. The following options are valid inside B<Aggregation> blocks:
427 =over 4
429 =item B<Host> I<Host>
431 =item B<Plugin> I<Plugin>
433 =item B<PluginInstance> I<PluginInstance>
435 =item B<Type> I<Type>
437 =item B<TypeInstance> I<TypeInstance>
439 Selects the value lists to be added to this aggregation. B<Type> must be a
440 valid data set name, see L<types.db(5)> for details.
442 If the string starts with and ends with a slash (C</>), the string is
443 interpreted as a I<regular expression>. The regex flavor used are POSIX
444 extended regular expressions as described in L<regex(7)>. Example usage:
446 Host "/^db[0-9]\\.example\\.com$/"
448 =item B<GroupBy> B<Host>|B<Plugin>|B<PluginInstance>|B<TypeInstance>
450 Group valued by the specified field. The B<GroupBy> option may be repeated to
451 group by multiple fields.
453 =item B<SetHost> I<Host>
455 =item B<SetPlugin> I<Plugin>
457 =item B<SetPluginInstance> I<PluginInstance>
459 =item B<SetTypeInstance> I<TypeInstance>
461 Sets the appropriate part of the identifier to the provided string.
463 The I<PluginInstance> should include the placeholder C<%{aggregation}> which
464 will be replaced with the aggregation function, e.g. "average". Not including
465 the placeholder will result in duplication warnings and/or messed up values if
466 more than one aggregation function are enabled.
468 The following example calculates the average usage of all "even" CPUs:
470 <Plugin "aggregation">
471 <Aggregation>
472 Plugin "cpu"
473 PluginInstance "/[0,2,4,6,8]$/"
474 Type "cpu"
476 SetPlugin "cpu"
477 SetPluginInstance "even-%{aggregation}"
479 GroupBy "Host"
480 GroupBy "TypeInstance"
482 CalculateAverage true
483 </Aggregation>
484 </Plugin>
486 This will create the files:
488 =over 4
490 =item
492 foo.example.com/cpu-even-average/cpu-idle
494 =item
496 foo.example.com/cpu-even-average/cpu-system
498 =item
500 foo.example.com/cpu-even-average/cpu-user
502 =item
504 ...
506 =back
508 =item B<CalculateNum> B<true>|B<false>
510 =item B<CalculateSum> B<true>|B<false>
512 =item B<CalculateAverage> B<true>|B<false>
514 =item B<CalculateMinimum> B<true>|B<false>
516 =item B<CalculateMaximum> B<true>|B<false>
518 =item B<CalculateStddev> B<true>|B<false>
520 Boolean options for enabling calculation of the number of value lists, their
521 sum, average, minimum, maximum andE<nbsp>/ or standard deviation. All options
522 are disabled by default.
524 =back
526 =head2 Plugin C<amqp>
528 The I<AMQP plugin> can be used to communicate with other instances of
529 I<collectd> or third party applications using an AMQP message broker. Values
530 are sent to or received from the broker, which handles routing, queueing and
531 possibly filtering out messages.
533 B<Synopsis:>
535 <Plugin "amqp">
536 # Send values to an AMQP broker
537 <Publish "some_name">
538 Host "localhost"
539 Port "5672"
540 VHost "/"
541 User "guest"
542 Password "guest"
543 Exchange "amq.fanout"
544 # ExchangeType "fanout"
545 # RoutingKey "collectd"
546 # Persistent false
547 # ConnectionRetryDelay 0
548 # Format "command"
549 # StoreRates false
550 # GraphitePrefix "collectd."
551 # GraphiteEscapeChar "_"
552 # GraphiteSeparateInstances false
553 # GraphiteAlwaysAppendDS false
554 </Publish>
556 # Receive values from an AMQP broker
557 <Subscribe "some_name">
558 Host "localhost"
559 Port "5672"
560 VHost "/"
561 User "guest"
562 Password "guest"
563 Exchange "amq.fanout"
564 # ExchangeType "fanout"
565 # Queue "queue_name"
566 # QueueDurable false
567 # QueueAutoDelete true
568 # RoutingKey "collectd.#"
569 # ConnectionRetryDelay 0
570 </Subscribe>
571 </Plugin>
573 The plugin's configuration consists of a number of I<Publish> and I<Subscribe>
574 blocks, which configure sending and receiving of values respectively. The two
575 blocks are very similar, so unless otherwise noted, an option can be used in
576 either block. The name given in the blocks starting tag is only used for
577 reporting messages, but may be used to support I<flushing> of certain
578 I<Publish> blocks in the future.
580 =over 4
582 =item B<Host> I<Host>
584 Hostname or IP-address of the AMQP broker. Defaults to the default behavior of
585 the underlying communications library, I<rabbitmq-c>, which is "localhost".
587 =item B<Port> I<Port>
589 Service name or port number on which the AMQP broker accepts connections. This
590 argument must be a string, even if the numeric form is used. Defaults to
591 "5672".
593 =item B<VHost> I<VHost>
595 Name of the I<virtual host> on the AMQP broker to use. Defaults to "/".
597 =item B<User> I<User>
599 =item B<Password> I<Password>
601 Credentials used to authenticate to the AMQP broker. By default "guest"/"guest"
602 is used.
604 =item B<Exchange> I<Exchange>
606 In I<Publish> blocks, this option specifies the I<exchange> to send values to.
607 By default, "amq.fanout" will be used.
609 In I<Subscribe> blocks this option is optional. If given, a I<binding> between
610 the given exchange and the I<queue> is created, using the I<routing key> if
611 configured. See the B<Queue> and B<RoutingKey> options below.
613 =item B<ExchangeType> I<Type>
615 If given, the plugin will try to create the configured I<exchange> with this
616 I<type> after connecting. When in a I<Subscribe> block, the I<queue> will then
617 be bound to this exchange.
619 =item B<Queue> I<Queue> (Subscribe only)
621 Configures the I<queue> name to subscribe to. If no queue name was configured
622 explicitly, a unique queue name will be created by the broker.
624 =item B<QueueDurable> B<true>|B<false> (Subscribe only)
626 Defines if the I<queue> subscribed to is durable (saved to persistent storage)
627 or transient (will disappear if the AMQP broker is restarted). Defaults to
628 "false".
630 This option should be used in conjunction with the I<Persistent> option on the
631 publish side.
633 =item B<QueueAutoDelete> B<true>|B<false> (Subscribe only)
635 Defines if the I<queue> subscribed to will be deleted once the last consumer
636 unsubscribes. Defaults to "true".
638 =item B<RoutingKey> I<Key>
640 In I<Publish> blocks, this configures the routing key to set on all outgoing
641 messages. If not given, the routing key will be computed from the I<identifier>
642 of the value. The host, plugin, type and the two instances are concatenated
643 together using dots as the separator and all containing dots replaced with
644 slashes. For example "collectd.host/example/com.cpu.0.cpu.user". This makes it
645 possible to receive only specific values using a "topic" exchange.
647 In I<Subscribe> blocks, configures the I<routing key> used when creating a
648 I<binding> between an I<exchange> and the I<queue>. The usual wildcards can be
649 used to filter messages when using a "topic" exchange. If you're only
650 interested in CPU statistics, you could use the routing key "collectd.*.cpu.#"
651 for example.
653 =item B<Persistent> B<true>|B<false> (Publish only)
655 Selects the I<delivery method> to use. If set to B<true>, the I<persistent>
656 mode will be used, i.e. delivery is guaranteed. If set to B<false> (the
657 default), the I<transient> delivery mode will be used, i.e. messages may be
658 lost due to high load, overflowing queues or similar issues.
660 =item B<ConnectionRetryDelay> I<Delay>
662 When the connection to the AMQP broker is lost, defines the time in seconds to
663 wait before attempting to reconnect. Defaults to 0, which implies collectd will
664 attempt to reconnect at each read interval (in Subscribe mode) or each time
665 values are ready for submission (in Publish mode).
667 =item B<Format> B<Command>|B<JSON>|B<Graphite> (Publish only)
669 Selects the format in which messages are sent to the broker. If set to
670 B<Command> (the default), values are sent as C<PUTVAL> commands which are
671 identical to the syntax used by the I<Exec> and I<UnixSock plugins>. In this
672 case, the C<Content-Type> header field will be set to C<text/collectd>.
674 If set to B<JSON>, the values are encoded in the I<JavaScript Object Notation>,
675 an easy and straight forward exchange format. The C<Content-Type> header field
676 will be set to C<application/json>.
678 If set to B<Graphite>, values are encoded in the I<Graphite> format, which is
679 "<metric> <value> <timestamp>\n". The C<Content-Type> header field will be set to
680 C<text/graphite>.
682 A subscribing client I<should> use the C<Content-Type> header field to
683 determine how to decode the values. Currently, the I<AMQP plugin> itself can
684 only decode the B<Command> format.
686 =item B<StoreRates> B<true>|B<false> (Publish only)
688 Determines whether or not C<COUNTER>, C<DERIVE> and C<ABSOLUTE> data sources
689 are converted to a I<rate> (i.e. a C<GAUGE> value). If set to B<false> (the
690 default), no conversion is performed. Otherwise the conversion is performed
691 using the internal value cache.
693 Please note that currently this option is only used if the B<Format> option has
694 been set to B<JSON>.
696 =item B<GraphitePrefix> (Publish and B<Format>=I<Graphite> only)
698 A prefix can be added in the metric name when outputting in the I<Graphite> format.
699 It's added before the I<Host> name.
700 Metric name will be "<prefix><host><postfix><plugin><type><name>"
702 =item B<GraphitePostfix> (Publish and B<Format>=I<Graphite> only)
704 A postfix can be added in the metric name when outputting in the I<Graphite> format.
705 It's added after the I<Host> name.
706 Metric name will be "<prefix><host><postfix><plugin><type><name>"
708 =item B<GraphiteEscapeChar> (Publish and B<Format>=I<Graphite> only)
710 Specify a character to replace dots (.) in the host part of the metric name.
711 In I<Graphite> metric name, dots are used as separators between different
712 metric parts (host, plugin, type).
713 Default is "_" (I<Underscore>).
715 =item B<GraphiteSeparateInstances> B<true>|B<false>
717 If set to B<true>, the plugin instance and type instance will be in their own
718 path component, for example C<host.cpu.0.cpu.idle>. If set to B<false> (the
719 default), the plugin and plugin instance (and likewise the type and type
720 instance) are put into one component, for example C<host.cpu-0.cpu-idle>.
722 =item B<GraphiteAlwaysAppendDS> B<true>|B<false>
724 If set to B<true>, append the name of the I<Data Source> (DS) to the "metric"
725 identifier. If set to B<false> (the default), this is only done when there is
726 more than one DS.
728 =back
730 =head2 Plugin C<apache>
732 To configure the C<apache>-plugin you first need to configure the Apache
733 webserver correctly. The Apache-plugin C<mod_status> needs to be loaded and
734 working and the C<ExtendedStatus> directive needs to be B<enabled>. You can use
735 the following snipped to base your Apache config upon:
737 ExtendedStatus on
738 <IfModule mod_status.c>
739 <Location /mod_status>
740 SetHandler server-status
741 </Location>
742 </IfModule>
744 Since its C<mod_status> module is very similar to Apache's, B<lighttpd> is
745 also supported. It introduces a new field, called C<BusyServers>, to count the
746 number of currently connected clients. This field is also supported.
748 The configuration of the I<Apache> plugin consists of one or more
749 C<E<lt>InstanceE<nbsp>/E<gt>> blocks. Each block requires one string argument
750 as the instance name. For example:
752 <Plugin "apache">
753 <Instance "www1">
754 URL "http://www1.example.com/mod_status?auto"
755 </Instance>
756 <Instance "www2">
757 URL "http://www2.example.com/mod_status?auto"
758 </Instance>
759 </Plugin>
761 The instance name will be used as the I<plugin instance>. To emulate the old
762 (versionE<nbsp>4) behavior, you can use an empty string (""). In order for the
763 plugin to work correctly, each instance name must be unique. This is not
764 enforced by the plugin and it is your responsibility to ensure it.
766 The following options are accepted within each I<Instance> block:
768 =over 4
770 =item B<URL> I<http://host/mod_status?auto>
772 Sets the URL of the C<mod_status> output. This needs to be the output generated
773 by C<ExtendedStatus on> and it needs to be the machine readable output
774 generated by appending the C<?auto> argument. This option is I<mandatory>.
776 =item B<User> I<Username>
778 Optional user name needed for authentication.
780 =item B<Password> I<Password>
782 Optional password needed for authentication.
784 =item B<VerifyPeer> B<true|false>
786 Enable or disable peer SSL certificate verification. See
787 L<http://curl.haxx.se/docs/sslcerts.html> for details. Enabled by default.
789 =item B<VerifyHost> B<true|false>
791 Enable or disable peer host name verification. If enabled, the plugin checks
792 if the C<Common Name> or a C<Subject Alternate Name> field of the SSL
793 certificate matches the host name provided by the B<URL> option. If this
794 identity check fails, the connection is aborted. Obviously, only works when
795 connecting to a SSL enabled server. Enabled by default.
797 =item B<CACert> I<File>
799 File that holds one or more SSL certificates. If you want to use HTTPS you will
800 possibly need this option. What CA certificates come bundled with C<libcurl>
801 and are checked by default depends on the distribution you use.
803 =item B<SSLCiphers> I<list of ciphers>
805 Specifies which ciphers to use in the connection. The list of ciphers
806 must specify valid ciphers. See
807 L<http://www.openssl.org/docs/apps/ciphers.html> for details.
809 =item B<Timeout> I<Milliseconds>
811 The B<Timeout> option sets the overall timeout for HTTP requests to B<URL>, in
812 milliseconds. By default, the configured B<Interval> is used to set the
813 timeout.
815 =back
817 =head2 Plugin C<apcups>
819 =over 4
821 =item B<Host> I<Hostname>
823 Hostname of the host running B<apcupsd>. Defaults to B<localhost>. Please note
824 that IPv6 support has been disabled unless someone can confirm or decline that
825 B<apcupsd> can handle it.
827 =item B<Port> I<Port>
829 TCP-Port to connect to. Defaults to B<3551>.
831 =item B<ReportSeconds> B<true>|B<false>
833 If set to B<true>, the time reported in the C<timeleft> metric will be
834 converted to seconds. This is the recommended setting. If set to B<false>, the
835 default for backwards compatibility, the time will be reported in minutes.
837 =item B<PersistentConnection> B<true>|B<false>
839 By default, the plugin will try to keep the connection to UPS open between
840 reads. Since this appears to be somewhat brittle (I<apcupsd> appears to close
841 the connection due to inactivity quite quickly), the plugin will try to detect
842 this problem and switch to an open-read-close mode in such cases.
844 You can instruct the plugin to close the connection after each read by setting
845 this option to B<false>.
847 =back
849 =head2 Plugin C<aquaero>
851 This plugin collects the value of the available sensors in an
852 I<AquaeroE<nbsp>5> board. AquaeroE<nbsp>5 is a water-cooling controller board,
853 manufactured by Aqua Computer GmbH L<http://www.aquacomputer.de/>, with a USB2
854 connection for monitoring and configuration. The board can handle multiple
855 temperature sensors, fans, water pumps and water level sensors and adjust the
856 output settings such as fan voltage or power used by the water pump based on
857 the available inputs using a configurable controller included in the board.
858 This plugin collects all the available inputs as well as some of the output
859 values chosen by this controller. The plugin is based on the I<libaquaero5>
860 library provided by I<aquatools-ng>.
862 =over 4
864 =item B<Device> I<DevicePath>
866 Device path of the AquaeroE<nbsp>5's USB HID (human interface device), usually
867 in the form C</dev/usb/hiddevX>. If this option is no set the plugin will try
868 to auto-detect the Aquaero 5 USB device based on vendor-ID and product-ID.
870 =back
872 =head2 Plugin C<ascent>
874 This plugin collects information about an Ascent server, a free server for the
875 "World of Warcraft" game. This plugin gathers the information by fetching the
876 XML status page using C<libcurl> and parses it using C<libxml2>.
878 The configuration options are the same as for the C<apache> plugin above:
880 =over 4
882 =item B<URL> I<http://localhost/ascent/status/>
884 Sets the URL of the XML status output.
886 =item B<User> I<Username>
888 Optional user name needed for authentication.
890 =item B<Password> I<Password>
892 Optional password needed for authentication.
894 =item B<VerifyPeer> B<true|false>
896 Enable or disable peer SSL certificate verification. See
897 L<http://curl.haxx.se/docs/sslcerts.html> for details. Enabled by default.
899 =item B<VerifyHost> B<true|false>
901 Enable or disable peer host name verification. If enabled, the plugin checks
902 if the C<Common Name> or a C<Subject Alternate Name> field of the SSL
903 certificate matches the host name provided by the B<URL> option. If this
904 identity check fails, the connection is aborted. Obviously, only works when
905 connecting to a SSL enabled server. Enabled by default.
907 =item B<CACert> I<File>
909 File that holds one or more SSL certificates. If you want to use HTTPS you will
910 possibly need this option. What CA certificates come bundled with C<libcurl>
911 and are checked by default depends on the distribution you use.
913 =item B<Timeout> I<Milliseconds>
915 The B<Timeout> option sets the overall timeout for HTTP requests to B<URL>, in
916 milliseconds. By default, the configured B<Interval> is used to set the
917 timeout.
919 =back
921 =head2 Plugin C<barometer>
923 This plugin reads absolute air pressure using digital barometer sensor on a I2C
924 bus. Supported sensors are:
926 =over 5
928 =item I<MPL115A2> from Freescale,
929 see L<http://www.freescale.com/webapp/sps/site/prod_summary.jsp?code=MPL115A>.
932 =item I<MPL3115> from Freescale
933 see L<http://www.freescale.com/webapp/sps/site/prod_summary.jsp?code=MPL3115A2>.
936 =item I<BMP085> from Bosch Sensortec
938 =back
940 The sensor type - one of the above - is detected automatically by the plugin
941 and indicated in the plugin_instance (you will see subdirectory
942 "barometer-mpl115" or "barometer-mpl3115", or "barometer-bmp085"). The order of
943 detection is BMP085 -> MPL3115 -> MPL115A2, the first one found will be used
944 (only one sensor can be used by the plugin).
946 The plugin provides absolute barometric pressure, air pressure reduced to sea
947 level (several possible approximations) and as an auxiliary value also internal
948 sensor temperature. It uses (expects/provides) typical metric units - pressure
949 in [hPa], temperature in [C], altitude in [m].
951 It was developed and tested under Linux only. The only platform dependency is
952 the standard Linux i2c-dev interface (the particular bus driver has to
953 support the SM Bus command subset).
955 The reduction or normalization to mean sea level pressure requires (depending
956 on selected method/approximation) also altitude and reference to temperature
957 sensor(s). When multiple temperature sensors are configured the minumum of
958 their values is always used (expecting that the warmer ones are affected by
959 e.g. direct sun light at that moment).
961 Synopsis:
963 <Plugin "barometer">
964 Device "/dev/i2c-0";
965 Oversampling 512
966 PressureOffset 0.0
967 TemperatureOffset 0.0
968 Normalization 2
969 Altitude 238.0
970 TemperatureSensor "myserver/onewire-F10FCA000800/temperature"
971 </Plugin>
973 =over 4
975 =item B<Device> I<device>
977 The only mandatory configuration parameter.
979 Device name of the I2C bus to which the sensor is connected. Note that
980 typically you need to have loaded the i2c-dev module.
981 Using i2c-tools you can check/list i2c buses available on your system by:
983 i2cdetect -l
985 Then you can scan for devices on given bus. E.g. to scan the whole bus 0 use:
987 i2cdetect -y -a 0
989 This way you should be able to verify that the pressure sensor (either type) is
990 connected and detected on address 0x60.
992 =item B<Oversampling> I<value>
994 Optional parameter controlling the oversampling/accuracy. Default value
995 is 1 providing fastest and least accurate reading.
997 For I<MPL115> this is the size of the averaging window. To filter out sensor
998 noise a simple averaging using floating window of this configurable size is
999 used. The plugin will use average of the last C<value> measurements (value of 1
1000 means no averaging). Minimal size is 1, maximal 1024.
1002 For I<MPL3115> this is the oversampling value. The actual oversampling is
1003 performed by the sensor and the higher value the higher accuracy and longer
1004 conversion time (although nothing to worry about in the collectd context).
1005 Supported values are: 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64 and 128. Any other value is
1006 adjusted by the plugin to the closest supported one.
1008 For I<BMP085> this is the oversampling value. The actual oversampling is
1009 performed by the sensor and the higher value the higher accuracy and longer
1010 conversion time (although nothing to worry about in the collectd context).
1011 Supported values are: 1, 2, 4, 8. Any other value is adjusted by the plugin to
1012 the closest supported one.
1014 =item B<PressureOffset> I<offset>
1016 Optional parameter for MPL3115 only.
1018 You can further calibrate the sensor by supplying pressure and/or temperature
1019 offsets. This is added to the measured/caclulated value (i.e. if the measured
1020 value is too high then use negative offset).
1021 In hPa, default is 0.0.
1023 =item B<TemperatureOffset> I<offset>
1025 Optional parameter for MPL3115 only.
1027 You can further calibrate the sensor by supplying pressure and/or temperature
1028 offsets. This is added to the measured/caclulated value (i.e. if the measured
1029 value is too high then use negative offset).
1030 In C, default is 0.0.
1032 =item B<Normalization> I<method>
1034 Optional parameter, default value is 0.
1036 Normalization method - what approximation/model is used to compute the mean sea
1037 level pressure from the air absolute pressure.
1039 Supported values of the C<method> (integer between from 0 to 2) are:
1041 =over 5
1043 =item B<0> - no conversion, absolute pressure is simply copied over. For this method you
1044 do not need to configure C<Altitude> or C<TemperatureSensor>.
1046 =item B<1> - international formula for conversion ,
1047 See
1048 L<http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Atmospheric_pressure#Altitude_atmospheric_pressure_variation>.
1049 For this method you have to configure C<Altitude> but do not need
1050 C<TemperatureSensor> (uses fixed global temperature average instead).
1052 =item B<2> - formula as recommended by the Deutsche Wetterdienst (German
1053 Meteorological Service).
1054 See L<http://de.wikipedia.org/wiki/Barometrische_H%C3%B6henformel#Theorie>
1055 For this method you have to configure both C<Altitude> and
1056 C<TemperatureSensor>.
1058 =back
1061 =item B<Altitude> I<altitude>
1063 The altitude (in meters) of the location where you meassure the pressure.
1065 =item B<TemperatureSensor> I<reference>
1067 Temperature sensor(s) which should be used as a reference when normalizing the
1068 pressure using C<Normalization> method 2.
1069 When specified more sensors a minumum is found and used each time. The
1070 temperature reading directly from this pressure sensor/plugin is typically not
1071 suitable as the pressure sensor will be probably inside while we want outside
1072 temperature. The collectd reference name is something like
1073 <hostname>/<plugin_name>-<plugin_instance>/<type>-<type_instance>
1074 (<type_instance> is usually omitted when there is just single value type). Or
1075 you can figure it out from the path of the output data files.
1077 =back
1079 =head2 Plugin C<battery>
1081 The I<battery plugin> reports the remaining capacity, power and voltage of
1082 laptop batteries.
1084 =over 4
1086 =item B<ValuesPercentage> B<false>|B<true>
1088 When enabled, remaining capacity is reported as a percentage, e.g. "42%
1089 capacity remaining". Otherwise the capacity is stored as reported by the
1090 battery, most likely in "Wh". This option does not work with all input methods,
1091 in particular when only C</proc/pmu> is available on an old Linux system.
1092 Defaults to B<false>.
1094 =item B<ReportDegraded> B<false>|B<true>
1096 Typical laptop batteries degrade over time, meaning the capacity decreases with
1097 recharge cycles. The maximum charge of the previous charge cycle is tracked as
1098 "last full capacity" and used to determine that a battery is "fully charged".
1100 When this option is set to B<false>, the default, the I<battery plugin> will
1101 only report the remaining capacity. If the B<ValuesPercentage> option is
1102 enabled, the relative remaining capacity is calculated as the ratio of the
1103 "remaining capacity" and the "last full capacity". This is what most tools,
1104 such as the status bar of desktop environments, also do.
1106 When set to B<true>, the battery plugin will report three values: B<charged>
1107 (remaining capacity), B<discharged> (difference between "last full capacity"
1108 and "remaining capacity") and B<degraded> (difference between "design capacity"
1109 and "last full capacity").
1111 =back
1113 =head2 Plugin C<bind>
1115 Starting with BIND 9.5.0, the most widely used DNS server software provides
1116 extensive statistics about queries, responses and lots of other information.
1117 The bind plugin retrieves this information that's encoded in XML and provided
1118 via HTTP and submits the values to collectd.
1120 To use this plugin, you first need to tell BIND to make this information
1121 available. This is done with the C<statistics-channels> configuration option:
1123 statistics-channels {
1124 inet localhost port 8053;
1125 };
1127 The configuration follows the grouping that can be seen when looking at the
1128 data with an XSLT compatible viewer, such as a modern web browser. It's
1129 probably a good idea to make yourself familiar with the provided values, so you
1130 can understand what the collected statistics actually mean.
1132 Synopsis:
1134 <Plugin "bind">
1135 URL "http://localhost:8053/"
1136 ParseTime false
1137 OpCodes true
1138 QTypes true
1140 ServerStats true
1141 ZoneMaintStats true
1142 ResolverStats false
1143 MemoryStats true
1145 <View "_default">
1146 QTypes true
1147 ResolverStats true
1148 CacheRRSets true
1150 Zone "127.in-addr.arpa/IN"
1151 </View>
1152 </Plugin>
1154 The bind plugin accepts the following configuration options:
1156 =over 4
1158 =item B<URL> I<URL>
1160 URL from which to retrieve the XML data. If not specified,
1161 C<http://localhost:8053/> will be used.
1163 =item B<ParseTime> B<true>|B<false>
1165 When set to B<true>, the time provided by BIND will be parsed and used to
1166 dispatch the values. When set to B<false>, the local time source is queried.
1168 This setting is set to B<true> by default for backwards compatibility; setting
1169 this to B<false> is I<recommended> to avoid problems with timezones and
1170 localization.
1172 =item B<OpCodes> B<true>|B<false>
1174 When enabled, statistics about the I<"OpCodes">, for example the number of
1175 C<QUERY> packets, are collected.
1177 Default: Enabled.
1179 =item B<QTypes> B<true>|B<false>
1181 When enabled, the number of I<incoming> queries by query types (for example
1182 C<A>, C<MX>, C<AAAA>) is collected.
1184 Default: Enabled.
1186 =item B<ServerStats> B<true>|B<false>
1188 Collect global server statistics, such as requests received over IPv4 and IPv6,
1189 successful queries, and failed updates.
1191 Default: Enabled.
1193 =item B<ZoneMaintStats> B<true>|B<false>
1195 Collect zone maintenance statistics, mostly information about notifications
1196 (zone updates) and zone transfers.
1198 Default: Enabled.
1200 =item B<ResolverStats> B<true>|B<false>
1202 Collect resolver statistics, i.E<nbsp>e. statistics about outgoing requests
1203 (e.E<nbsp>g. queries over IPv4, lame servers). Since the global resolver
1204 counters apparently were removed in BIND 9.5.1 and 9.6.0, this is disabled by
1205 default. Use the B<ResolverStats> option within a B<View "_default"> block
1206 instead for the same functionality.
1208 Default: Disabled.
1210 =item B<MemoryStats>
1212 Collect global memory statistics.
1214 Default: Enabled.
1216 =item B<Timeout> I<Milliseconds>
1218 The B<Timeout> option sets the overall timeout for HTTP requests to B<URL>, in
1219 milliseconds. By default, the configured B<Interval> is used to set the
1220 timeout.
1222 =item B<View> I<Name>
1224 Collect statistics about a specific I<"view">. BIND can behave different,
1225 mostly depending on the source IP-address of the request. These different
1226 configurations are called "views". If you don't use this feature, you most
1227 likely are only interested in the C<_default> view.
1229 Within a E<lt>B<View>E<nbsp>I<name>E<gt> block, you can specify which
1230 information you want to collect about a view. If no B<View> block is
1231 configured, no detailed view statistics will be collected.
1233 =over 4
1235 =item B<QTypes> B<true>|B<false>
1237 If enabled, the number of I<outgoing> queries by query type (e.E<nbsp>g. C<A>,
1238 C<MX>) is collected.
1240 Default: Enabled.
1242 =item B<ResolverStats> B<true>|B<false>
1244 Collect resolver statistics, i.E<nbsp>e. statistics about outgoing requests
1245 (e.E<nbsp>g. queries over IPv4, lame servers).
1247 Default: Enabled.
1249 =item B<CacheRRSets> B<true>|B<false>
1251 If enabled, the number of entries (I<"RR sets">) in the view's cache by query
1252 type is collected. Negative entries (queries which resulted in an error, for
1253 example names that do not exist) are reported with a leading exclamation mark,
1254 e.E<nbsp>g. "!A".
1256 Default: Enabled.
1258 =item B<Zone> I<Name>
1260 When given, collect detailed information about the given zone in the view. The
1261 information collected if very similar to the global B<ServerStats> information
1262 (see above).
1264 You can repeat this option to collect detailed information about multiple
1265 zones.
1267 By default no detailed zone information is collected.
1269 =back
1271 =back
1273 =head2 Plugin C<ceph>
1275 The ceph plugin collects values from JSON data to be parsed by B<libyajl>
1276 (L<https://lloyd.github.io/yajl/>) retrieved from ceph daemon admin sockets.
1278 A separate B<Daemon> block must be configured for each ceph daemon to be
1279 monitored. The following example will read daemon statistics from four
1280 separate ceph daemons running on the same device (two OSDs, one MON, one MDS) :
1282 <Plugin ceph>
1283 LongRunAvgLatency false
1284 ConvertSpecialMetricTypes true
1285 <Daemon "osd.0">
1286 SocketPath "/var/run/ceph/ceph-osd.0.asok"
1287 </Daemon>
1288 <Daemon "osd.1">
1289 SocketPath "/var/run/ceph/ceph-osd.1.asok"
1290 </Daemon>
1291 <Daemon "mon.a">
1292 SocketPath "/var/run/ceph/ceph-mon.ceph1.asok"
1293 </Daemon>
1294 <Daemon "mds.a">
1295 SocketPath "/var/run/ceph/ceph-mds.ceph1.asok"
1296 </Daemon>
1297 </Plugin>
1299 The ceph plugin accepts the following configuration options:
1301 =over 4
1303 =item B<LongRunAvgLatency> B<true>|B<false>
1305 If enabled, latency values(sum,count pairs) are calculated as the long run
1306 average - average since the ceph daemon was started = (sum / count).
1307 When disabled, latency values are calculated as the average since the last
1308 collection = (sum_now - sum_last) / (count_now - count_last).
1310 Default: Disabled
1312 =item B<ConvertSpecialMetricTypes> B<true>|B<false>
1314 If enabled, special metrics (metrics that differ in type from similar counters)
1315 are converted to the type of those similar counters. This currently only
1316 applies to filestore.journal_wr_bytes which is a counter for OSD daemons. The
1317 ceph schema reports this metric type as a sum,count pair while similar counters
1318 are treated as derive types. When converted, the sum is used as the counter
1319 value and is treated as a derive type.
1320 When disabled, all metrics are treated as the types received from the ceph schema.
1322 Default: Enabled
1324 =back
1326 Each B<Daemon> block must have a string argument for the plugin instance name.
1327 A B<SocketPath> is also required for each B<Daemon> block:
1329 =over 4
1331 =item B<Daemon> I<DaemonName>
1333 Name to be used as the instance name for this daemon.
1335 =item B<SocketPath> I<SocketPath>
1337 Specifies the path to the UNIX admin socket of the ceph daemon.
1339 =back
1341 =head2 Plugin C<cgroups>
1343 This plugin collects the CPU user/system time for each I<cgroup> by reading the
1344 F<cpuacct.stat> files in the first cpuacct-mountpoint (typically
1345 F</sys/fs/cgroup/cpu.cpuacct> on machines using systemd).
1347 =over 4
1349 =item B<CGroup> I<Directory>
1351 Select I<cgroup> based on the name. Whether only matching I<cgroups> are
1352 collected or if they are ignored is controlled by the B<IgnoreSelected> option;
1353 see below.
1355 =item B<IgnoreSelected> B<true>|B<false>
1357 Invert the selection: If set to true, all cgroups I<except> the ones that
1358 match any one of the criteria are collected. By default only selected
1359 cgroups are collected if a selection is made. If no selection is configured
1360 at all, B<all> cgroups are selected.
1362 =back
1364 =head2 Plugin C<conntrack>
1366 This plugin collects IP conntrack statistics.
1368 =over 4
1370 =item B<OldFiles>
1372 Assume the B<conntrack_count> and B<conntrack_max> files to be found in
1373 F</proc/sys/net/ipv4/netfilter> instead of F</proc/sys/net/netfilter/>.
1375 =back
1377 =head2 Plugin C<cpu>
1379 The I<CPU plugin> collects CPU usage metrics. By default, CPU usage is reported
1380 as Jiffies, using the C<cpu> type. Two aggregations are available:
1382 =over 4
1384 =item
1386 Sum, per-state, over all CPUs installed in the system; and
1388 =item
1390 Sum, per-CPU, over all non-idle states of a CPU, creating an "active" state.
1392 =back
1394 The two aggregations can be combined, leading to I<collectd> only emitting a
1395 single "active" metric for the entire system. As soon as one of these
1396 aggregations (or both) is enabled, the I<cpu plugin> will report a percentage,
1397 rather than Jiffies. In addition, you can request individual, per-state,
1398 per-CPU metrics to be reported as percentage.
1400 The following configuration options are available:
1402 =over 4
1404 =item B<ReportByState> B<true>|B<false>
1406 When set to B<true>, the default, reports per-state metrics, e.g. "system",
1407 "user" and "idle".
1408 When set to B<false>, aggregates (sums) all I<non-idle> states into one
1409 "active" metric.
1411 =item B<ReportByCpu> B<true>|B<false>
1413 When set to B<true>, the default, reports per-CPU (per-core) metrics.
1414 When set to B<false>, instead of reporting metrics for individual CPUs, only a
1415 global sum of CPU states is emitted.
1417 =item B<ValuesPercentage> B<false>|B<true>
1419 This option is only considered when both, B<ReportByCpu> and B<ReportByState>
1420 are set to B<true>. In this case, by default, metrics will be reported as
1421 Jiffies. By setting this option to B<true>, you can request percentage values
1422 in the un-aggregated (per-CPU, per-state) mode as well.
1424 =back
1426 =head2 Plugin C<cpufreq>
1428 This plugin doesn't have any options. It reads
1429 F</sys/devices/system/cpu/cpu0/cpufreq/scaling_cur_freq> (for the first CPU
1430 installed) to get the current CPU frequency. If this file does not exist make
1431 sure B<cpufreqd> (L<http://cpufreqd.sourceforge.net/>) or a similar tool is
1432 installed and an "cpu governor" (that's a kernel module) is loaded.
1434 =head2 Plugin C<csv>
1436 =over 4
1438 =item B<DataDir> I<Directory>
1440 Set the directory to store CSV-files under. Per default CSV-files are generated
1441 beneath the daemon's working directory, i.E<nbsp>e. the B<BaseDir>.
1442 The special strings B<stdout> and B<stderr> can be used to write to the standard
1443 output and standard error channels, respectively. This, of course, only makes
1444 much sense when collectd is running in foreground- or non-daemon-mode.
1446 =item B<StoreRates> B<true|false>
1448 If set to B<true>, convert counter values to rates. If set to B<false> (the
1449 default) counter values are stored as is, i.E<nbsp>e. as an increasing integer
1450 number.
1452 =back
1454 =head2 Plugin C<curl>
1456 The curl plugin uses the B<libcurl> (L<http://curl.haxx.se/>) to read web pages
1457 and the match infrastructure (the same code used by the tail plugin) to use
1458 regular expressions with the received data.
1460 The following example will read the current value of AMD stock from Google's
1461 finance page and dispatch the value to collectd.
1463 <Plugin curl>
1464 <Page "stock_quotes">
1465 URL "http://finance.google.com/finance?q=NYSE%3AAMD"
1466 User "foo"
1467 Password "bar"
1468 Digest false
1469 VerifyPeer true
1470 VerifyHost true
1471 CACert "/path/to/ca.crt"
1472 Header "X-Custom-Header: foobar"
1473 Post "foo=bar"
1475 MeasureResponseTime false
1476 MeasureResponseCode false
1478 <Match>
1479 Regex "<span +class=\"pr\"[^>]*> *([0-9]*\\.[0-9]+) *</span>"
1480 DSType "GaugeAverage"
1481 # Note: `stock_value' is not a standard type.
1482 Type "stock_value"
1483 Instance "AMD"
1484 </Match>
1485 </Page>
1486 </Plugin>
1488 In the B<Plugin> block, there may be one or more B<Page> blocks, each defining
1489 a web page and one or more "matches" to be performed on the returned data. The
1490 string argument to the B<Page> block is used as plugin instance.
1492 The following options are valid within B<Page> blocks:
1494 =over 4
1496 =item B<URL> I<URL>
1498 URL of the web site to retrieve. Since a regular expression will be used to
1499 extract information from this data, non-binary data is a big plus here ;)
1501 =item B<User> I<Name>
1503 Username to use if authorization is required to read the page.
1505 =item B<Password> I<Password>
1507 Password to use if authorization is required to read the page.
1509 =item B<Digest> B<true>|B<false>
1511 Enable HTTP digest authentication.
1513 =item B<VerifyPeer> B<true>|B<false>
1515 Enable or disable peer SSL certificate verification. See
1516 L<http://curl.haxx.se/docs/sslcerts.html> for details. Enabled by default.
1518 =item B<VerifyHost> B<true>|B<false>
1520 Enable or disable peer host name verification. If enabled, the plugin checks if
1521 the C<Common Name> or a C<Subject Alternate Name> field of the SSL certificate
1522 matches the host name provided by the B<URL> option. If this identity check
1523 fails, the connection is aborted. Obviously, only works when connecting to a
1524 SSL enabled server. Enabled by default.
1526 =item B<CACert> I<file>
1528 File that holds one or more SSL certificates. If you want to use HTTPS you will
1529 possibly need this option. What CA certificates come bundled with C<libcurl>
1530 and are checked by default depends on the distribution you use.
1532 =item B<Header> I<Header>
1534 A HTTP header to add to the request. Multiple headers are added if this option
1535 is specified more than once.
1537 =item B<Post> I<Body>
1539 Specifies that the HTTP operation should be a POST instead of a GET. The
1540 complete data to be posted is given as the argument. This option will usually
1541 need to be accompanied by a B<Header> option to set an appropriate
1542 C<Content-Type> for the post body (e.g. to
1543 C<application/x-www-form-urlencoded>).
1545 =item B<MeasureResponseTime> B<true>|B<false>
1547 Measure response time for the request. If this setting is enabled, B<Match>
1548 blocks (see below) are optional. Disabled by default.
1550 Beware that requests will get aborted if they take too long to complete. Adjust
1551 B<Timeout> accordingly if you expect B<MeasureResponseTime> to report such slow
1552 requests.
1554 =item B<MeasureResponseCode> B<true>|B<false>
1556 Measure response code for the request. If this setting is enabled, B<Match>
1557 blocks (see below) are optional. Disabled by default.
1559 =item B<E<lt>MatchE<gt>>
1561 One or more B<Match> blocks that define how to match information in the data
1562 returned by C<libcurl>. The C<curl> plugin uses the same infrastructure that's
1563 used by the C<tail> plugin, so please see the documentation of the C<tail>
1564 plugin below on how matches are defined. If the B<MeasureResponseTime> or
1565 B<MeasureResponseCode> options are set to B<true>, B<Match> blocks are
1566 optional.
1568 =item B<Timeout> I<Milliseconds>
1570 The B<Timeout> option sets the overall timeout for HTTP requests to B<URL>, in
1571 milliseconds. By default, the configured B<Interval> is used to set the
1572 timeout. Prior to version 5.5.0, there was no timeout and requests could hang
1573 indefinitely. This legacy behaviour can be achieved by setting the value of
1574 B<Timeout> to 0.
1576 If B<Timeout> is 0 or bigger than the B<Interval>, keep in mind that each slow
1577 network connection will stall one read thread. Adjust the B<ReadThreads> global
1578 setting accordingly to prevent this from blocking other plugins.
1580 =back
1582 =head2 Plugin C<curl_json>
1584 The B<curl_json plugin> collects values from JSON data to be parsed by
1585 B<libyajl> (L<https://lloyd.github.io/yajl/>) retrieved via
1586 either B<libcurl> (L<http://curl.haxx.se/>) or read directly from a
1587 unix socket. The former can be used, for example, to collect values
1588 from CouchDB documents (which are stored JSON notation), and the
1589 latter to collect values from a uWSGI stats socket.
1591 The following example will collect several values from the built-in
1592 C<_stats> runtime statistics module of I<CouchDB>
1593 (L<http://wiki.apache.org/couchdb/Runtime_Statistics>).
1595 <Plugin curl_json>
1596 <URL "http://localhost:5984/_stats">
1597 Instance "httpd"
1598 <Key "httpd/requests/count">
1599 Type "http_requests"
1600 </Key>
1602 <Key "httpd_request_methods/*/count">
1603 Type "http_request_methods"
1604 </Key>
1606 <Key "httpd_status_codes/*/count">
1607 Type "http_response_codes"
1608 </Key>
1609 </URL>
1610 </Plugin>
1612 This example will collect data directly from a I<uWSGI> "Stats Server" socket.
1614 <Plugin curl_json>
1615 <Sock "/var/run/uwsgi.stats.sock">
1616 Instance "uwsgi"
1617 <Key "workers/*/requests">
1618 Type "http_requests"
1619 </Key>
1621 <Key "workers/*/apps/*/requests">
1622 Type "http_requests"
1623 </Key>
1624 </Sock>
1625 </Plugin>
1627 In the B<Plugin> block, there may be one or more B<URL> blocks, each
1628 defining a URL to be fetched via HTTP (using libcurl) or B<Sock>
1629 blocks defining a unix socket to read JSON from directly. Each of
1630 these blocks may have one or more B<Key> blocks.
1632 The B<Key> string argument must be in a path format. Each component is
1633 used to match the key from a JSON map or the index of an JSON
1634 array. If a path component of a B<Key> is a I<*>E<nbsp>wildcard, the
1635 values for all map keys or array indices will be collectd.
1637 The following options are valid within B<URL> blocks:
1639 =over 4
1641 =item B<Instance> I<Instance>
1643 Sets the plugin instance to I<Instance>.
1645 =item B<Interval> I<Interval>
1647 Sets the interval (in seconds) in which the values will be collected from this
1648 URL. By default the global B<Interval> setting will be used.
1650 =item B<User> I<Name>
1652 =item B<Password> I<Password>
1654 =item B<Digest> B<true>|B<false>
1656 =item B<VerifyPeer> B<true>|B<false>
1658 =item B<VerifyHost> B<true>|B<false>
1660 =item B<CACert> I<file>
1662 =item B<Header> I<Header>
1664 =item B<Post> I<Body>
1666 =item B<Timeout> I<Milliseconds>
1668 These options behave exactly equivalent to the appropriate options of the
1669 I<cURL> plugin. Please see there for a detailed description.
1671 =back
1673 The following options are valid within B<Key> blocks:
1675 =over 4
1677 =item B<Type> I<Type>
1679 Sets the type used to dispatch the values to the daemon. Detailed information
1680 about types and their configuration can be found in L<types.db(5)>. This
1681 option is mandatory.
1683 =item B<Instance> I<Instance>
1685 Type-instance to use. Defaults to the current map key or current string array element value.
1687 =back
1689 =head2 Plugin C<curl_xml>
1691 The B<curl_xml plugin> uses B<libcurl> (L<http://curl.haxx.se/>) and B<libxml2>
1692 (L<http://xmlsoft.org/>) to retrieve XML data via cURL.
1694 <Plugin "curl_xml">
1695 <URL "http://localhost/stats.xml">
1696 Host "my_host"
1697 Instance "some_instance"
1698 User "collectd"
1699 Password "thaiNg0I"
1700 VerifyPeer true
1701 VerifyHost true
1702 CACert "/path/to/ca.crt"
1703 Header "X-Custom-Header: foobar"
1704 Post "foo=bar"
1706 <XPath "table[@id=\"magic_level\"]/tr">
1707 Type "magic_level"
1708 #InstancePrefix "prefix-"
1709 InstanceFrom "td[1]"
1710 ValuesFrom "td[2]/span[@class=\"level\"]"
1711 </XPath>
1712 </URL>
1713 </Plugin>
1715 In the B<Plugin> block, there may be one or more B<URL> blocks, each defining a
1716 URL to be fetched using libcurl. Within each B<URL> block there are
1717 options which specify the connection parameters, for example authentication
1718 information, and one or more B<XPath> blocks.
1720 Each B<XPath> block specifies how to get one type of information. The
1721 string argument must be a valid XPath expression which returns a list
1722 of "base elements". One value is dispatched for each "base element". The
1723 I<type instance> and values are looked up using further I<XPath> expressions
1724 that should be relative to the base element.
1726 Within the B<URL> block the following options are accepted:
1728 =over 4
1730 =item B<Host> I<Name>
1732 Use I<Name> as the host name when submitting values. Defaults to the global
1733 host name setting.
1735 =item B<Instance> I<Instance>
1737 Use I<Instance> as the plugin instance when submitting values. Defaults to an
1738 empty string (no plugin instance).
1740 =item B<Namespace> I<Prefix> I<URL>
1742 If an XPath expression references namespaces, they must be specified
1743 with this option. I<Prefix> is the "namespace prefix" used in the XML document.
1744 I<URL> is the "namespace name", an URI reference uniquely identifying the
1745 namespace. The option can be repeated to register multiple namespaces.
1747 Examples:
1749 Namespace "s" "http://schemas.xmlsoap.org/soap/envelope/"
1750 Namespace "m" "http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
1752 =item B<User> I<User>
1754 =item B<Password> I<Password>
1756 =item B<Digest> B<true>|B<false>
1758 =item B<VerifyPeer> B<true>|B<false>
1760 =item B<VerifyHost> B<true>|B<false>
1762 =item B<CACert> I<CA Cert File>
1764 =item B<Header> I<Header>
1766 =item B<Post> I<Body>
1768 =item B<Timeout> I<Milliseconds>
1770 These options behave exactly equivalent to the appropriate options of the
1771 I<cURL plugin>. Please see there for a detailed description.
1773 =item E<lt>B<XPath> I<XPath-expression>E<gt>
1775 Within each B<URL> block, there must be one or more B<XPath> blocks. Each
1776 B<XPath> block specifies how to get one type of information. The string
1777 argument must be a valid XPath expression which returns a list of "base
1778 elements". One value is dispatched for each "base element".
1780 Within the B<XPath> block the following options are accepted:
1782 =over 4
1784 =item B<Type> I<Type>
1786 Specifies the I<Type> used for submitting patches. This determines the number
1787 of values that are required / expected and whether the strings are parsed as
1788 signed or unsigned integer or as double values. See L<types.db(5)> for details.
1789 This option is required.
1791 =item B<InstancePrefix> I<InstancePrefix>
1793 Prefix the I<type instance> with I<InstancePrefix>. The values are simply
1794 concatenated together without any separator.
1795 This option is optional.
1797 =item B<InstanceFrom> I<InstanceFrom>
1799 Specifies a XPath expression to use for determining the I<type instance>. The
1800 XPath expression must return exactly one element. The element's value is then
1801 used as I<type instance>, possibly prefixed with I<InstancePrefix> (see above).
1803 This value is required. As a special exception, if the "base XPath expression"
1804 (the argument to the B<XPath> block) returns exactly one argument, then this
1805 option may be omitted.
1807 =item B<ValuesFrom> I<ValuesFrom> [I<ValuesFrom> ...]
1809 Specifies one or more XPath expression to use for reading the values. The
1810 number of XPath expressions must match the number of data sources in the
1811 I<type> specified with B<Type> (see above). Each XPath expression must return
1812 exactly one element. The element's value is then parsed as a number and used as
1813 value for the appropriate value in the value list dispatched to the daemon.
1815 =back
1817 =back
1819 =head2 Plugin C<dbi>
1821 This plugin uses the B<dbi> library (L<http://libdbi.sourceforge.net/>) to
1822 connect to various databases, execute I<SQL> statements and read back the
1823 results. I<dbi> is an acronym for "database interface" in case you were
1824 wondering about the name. You can configure how each column is to be
1825 interpreted and the plugin will generate one or more data sets from each row
1826 returned according to these rules.
1828 Because the plugin is very generic, the configuration is a little more complex
1829 than those of other plugins. It usually looks something like this:
1831 <Plugin dbi>
1832 <Query "out_of_stock">
1833 Statement "SELECT category, COUNT(*) AS value FROM products WHERE in_stock = 0 GROUP BY category"
1834 # Use with MySQL 5.0.0 or later
1835 MinVersion 50000
1836 <Result>
1837 Type "gauge"
1838 InstancePrefix "out_of_stock"
1839 InstancesFrom "category"
1840 ValuesFrom "value"
1841 </Result>
1842 </Query>
1843 <Database "product_information">
1844 Driver "mysql"
1845 Interval 120
1846 DriverOption "host" "localhost"
1847 DriverOption "username" "collectd"
1848 DriverOption "password" "aZo6daiw"
1849 DriverOption "dbname" "prod_info"
1850 SelectDB "prod_info"
1851 Query "out_of_stock"
1852 </Database>
1853 </Plugin>
1855 The configuration above defines one query with one result and one database. The
1856 query is then linked to the database with the B<Query> option I<within> the
1857 B<E<lt>DatabaseE<gt>> block. You can have any number of queries and databases
1858 and you can also use the B<Include> statement to split up the configuration
1859 file in multiple, smaller files. However, the B<E<lt>QueryE<gt>> block I<must>
1860 precede the B<E<lt>DatabaseE<gt>> blocks, because the file is interpreted from
1861 top to bottom!
1863 The following is a complete list of options:
1865 =head3 B<Query> blocks
1867 Query blocks define I<SQL> statements and how the returned data should be
1868 interpreted. They are identified by the name that is given in the opening line
1869 of the block. Thus the name needs to be unique. Other than that, the name is
1870 not used in collectd.
1872 In each B<Query> block, there is one or more B<Result> blocks. B<Result> blocks
1873 define which column holds which value or instance information. You can use
1874 multiple B<Result> blocks to create multiple values from one returned row. This
1875 is especially useful, when queries take a long time and sending almost the same
1876 query again and again is not desirable.
1878 Example:
1880 <Query "environment">
1881 Statement "select station, temperature, humidity from environment"
1882 <Result>
1883 Type "temperature"
1884 # InstancePrefix "foo"
1885 InstancesFrom "station"
1886 ValuesFrom "temperature"
1887 </Result>
1888 <Result>
1889 Type "humidity"
1890 InstancesFrom "station"
1891 ValuesFrom "humidity"
1892 </Result>
1893 </Query>
1895 The following options are accepted:
1897 =over 4
1899 =item B<Statement> I<SQL>
1901 Sets the statement that should be executed on the server. This is B<not>
1902 interpreted by collectd, but simply passed to the database server. Therefore,
1903 the SQL dialect that's used depends on the server collectd is connected to.
1905 The query has to return at least two columns, one for the instance and one
1906 value. You cannot omit the instance, even if the statement is guaranteed to
1907 always return exactly one line. In that case, you can usually specify something
1908 like this:
1910 Statement "SELECT \"instance\", COUNT(*) AS value FROM table"
1912 (That works with MySQL but may not be valid SQL according to the spec. If you
1913 use a more strict database server, you may have to select from a dummy table or
1914 something.)
1916 Please note that some databases, for example B<Oracle>, will fail if you
1917 include a semicolon at the end of the statement.
1919 =item B<MinVersion> I<Version>
1921 =item B<MaxVersion> I<Value>
1923 Only use this query for the specified database version. You can use these
1924 options to provide multiple queries with the same name but with a slightly
1925 different syntax. The plugin will use only those queries, where the specified
1926 minimum and maximum versions fit the version of the database in use.
1928 The database version is determined by C<dbi_conn_get_engine_version>, see the
1929 L<libdbi documentation|http://libdbi.sourceforge.net/docs/programmers-guide/reference-conn.html#DBI-CONN-GET-ENGINE-VERSION>
1930 for details. Basically, each part of the version is assumed to be in the range
1931 from B<00> to B<99> and all dots are removed. So version "4.1.2" becomes
1932 "40102", version "5.0.42" becomes "50042".
1934 B<Warning:> The plugin will use B<all> matching queries, so if you specify
1935 multiple queries with the same name and B<overlapping> ranges, weird stuff will
1936 happen. Don't to it! A valid example would be something along these lines:
1938 MinVersion 40000
1939 MaxVersion 49999
1940 ...
1941 MinVersion 50000
1942 MaxVersion 50099
1943 ...
1944 MinVersion 50100
1945 # No maximum
1947 In the above example, there are three ranges that don't overlap. The last one
1948 goes from version "5.1.0" to infinity, meaning "all later versions". Versions
1949 before "4.0.0" are not specified.
1951 =item B<Type> I<Type>
1953 The B<type> that's used for each line returned. See L<types.db(5)> for more
1954 details on how types are defined. In short: A type is a predefined layout of
1955 data and the number of values and type of values has to match the type
1956 definition.
1958 If you specify "temperature" here, you need exactly one gauge column. If you
1959 specify "if_octets", you will need two counter columns. See the B<ValuesFrom>
1960 setting below.
1962 There must be exactly one B<Type> option inside each B<Result> block.
1964 =item B<InstancePrefix> I<prefix>
1966 Prepends I<prefix> to the type instance. If B<InstancesFrom> (see below) is not
1967 given, the string is simply copied. If B<InstancesFrom> is given, I<prefix> and
1968 all strings returned in the appropriate columns are concatenated together,
1969 separated by dashes I<("-")>.
1971 =item B<InstancesFrom> I<column0> [I<column1> ...]
1973 Specifies the columns whose values will be used to create the "type-instance"
1974 for each row. If you specify more than one column, the value of all columns
1975 will be joined together with dashes I<("-")> as separation characters.
1977 The plugin itself does not check whether or not all built instances are
1978 different. It's your responsibility to assure that each is unique. This is
1979 especially true, if you do not specify B<InstancesFrom>: B<You> have to make
1980 sure that only one row is returned in this case.
1982 If neither B<InstancePrefix> nor B<InstancesFrom> is given, the type-instance
1983 will be empty.
1985 =item B<ValuesFrom> I<column0> [I<column1> ...]
1987 Names the columns whose content is used as the actual data for the data sets
1988 that are dispatched to the daemon. How many such columns you need is determined
1989 by the B<Type> setting above. If you specify too many or not enough columns,
1990 the plugin will complain about that and no data will be submitted to the
1991 daemon.
1993 The actual data type in the columns is not that important. The plugin will
1994 automatically cast the values to the right type if it know how to do that. So
1995 it should be able to handle integer an floating point types, as well as strings
1996 (if they include a number at the beginning).
1998 There must be at least one B<ValuesFrom> option inside each B<Result> block.
2000 =item B<MetadataFrom> [I<column0> I<column1> ...]
2002 Names the columns whose content is used as metadata for the data sets
2003 that are dispatched to the daemon.
2005 The actual data type in the columns is not that important. The plugin will
2006 automatically cast the values to the right type if it know how to do that. So
2007 it should be able to handle integer an floating point types, as well as strings
2008 (if they include a number at the beginning).
2010 =back
2012 =head3 B<Database> blocks
2014 Database blocks define a connection to a database and which queries should be
2015 sent to that database. Since the used "dbi" library can handle a wide variety
2016 of databases, the configuration is very generic. If in doubt, refer to libdbi's
2017 documentationE<nbsp>- we stick as close to the terminology used there.
2019 Each database needs a "name" as string argument in the starting tag of the
2020 block. This name will be used as "PluginInstance" in the values submitted to
2021 the daemon. Other than that, that name is not used.
2023 =over 4
2025 =item B<Interval> I<Interval>
2027 Sets the interval (in seconds) in which the values will be collected from this
2028 database. By default the global B<Interval> setting will be used.
2030 =item B<Driver> I<Driver>
2032 Specifies the driver to use to connect to the database. In many cases those
2033 drivers are named after the database they can connect to, but this is not a
2034 technical necessity. These drivers are sometimes referred to as "DBD",
2035 B<D>ataB<B>ase B<D>river, and some distributions ship them in separate
2036 packages. Drivers for the "dbi" library are developed by the B<libdbi-drivers>
2037 project at L<http://libdbi-drivers.sourceforge.net/>.
2039 You need to give the driver name as expected by the "dbi" library here. You
2040 should be able to find that in the documentation for each driver. If you
2041 mistype the driver name, the plugin will dump a list of all known driver names
2042 to the log.
2044 =item B<DriverOption> I<Key> I<Value>
2046 Sets driver-specific options. What option a driver supports can be found in the
2047 documentation for each driver, somewhere at
2048 L<http://libdbi-drivers.sourceforge.net/>. However, the options "host",
2049 "username", "password", and "dbname" seem to be deE<nbsp>facto standards.
2051 DBDs can register two types of options: String options and numeric options. The
2052 plugin will use the C<dbi_conn_set_option> function when the configuration
2053 provides a string and the C<dbi_conn_require_option_numeric> function when the
2054 configuration provides a number. So these two lines will actually result in
2055 different calls being used:
2057 DriverOption "Port" 1234 # numeric
2058 DriverOption "Port" "1234" # string
2060 Unfortunately, drivers are not too keen to report errors when an unknown option
2061 is passed to them, so invalid settings here may go unnoticed. This is not the
2062 plugin's fault, it will report errors if it gets them from the libraryE<nbsp>/
2063 the driver. If a driver complains about an option, the plugin will dump a
2064 complete list of all options understood by that driver to the log. There is no
2065 way to programatically find out if an option expects a string or a numeric
2066 argument, so you will have to refer to the appropriate DBD's documentation to
2067 find this out. Sorry.
2069 =item B<SelectDB> I<Database>
2071 In some cases, the database name you connect with is not the database name you
2072 want to use for querying data. If this option is set, the plugin will "select"
2073 (switch to) that database after the connection is established.
2075 =item B<Query> I<QueryName>
2077 Associates the query named I<QueryName> with this database connection. The
2078 query needs to be defined I<before> this statement, i.E<nbsp>e. all query
2079 blocks you want to refer to must be placed above the database block you want to
2080 refer to them from.
2082 =item B<Host> I<Hostname>
2084 Sets the B<host> field of I<value lists> to I<Hostname> when dispatching
2085 values. Defaults to the global hostname setting.
2087 =back
2089 =head2 Plugin C<df>
2091 =over 4
2093 =item B<Device> I<Device>
2095 Select partitions based on the devicename.
2097 =item B<MountPoint> I<Directory>
2099 Select partitions based on the mountpoint.
2101 =item B<FSType> I<FSType>
2103 Select partitions based on the filesystem type.
2105 =item B<IgnoreSelected> B<true>|B<false>
2107 Invert the selection: If set to true, all partitions B<except> the ones that
2108 match any one of the criteria are collected. By default only selected
2109 partitions are collected if a selection is made. If no selection is configured
2110 at all, B<all> partitions are selected.
2112 =item B<ReportByDevice> B<true>|B<false>
2114 Report using the device name rather than the mountpoint. i.e. with this I<false>,
2115 (the default), it will report a disk as "root", but with it I<true>, it will be
2116 "sda1" (or whichever).
2118 =item B<ReportInodes> B<true>|B<false>
2120 Enables or disables reporting of free, reserved and used inodes. Defaults to
2121 inode collection being disabled.
2123 Enable this option if inodes are a scarce resource for you, usually because
2124 many small files are stored on the disk. This is a usual scenario for mail
2125 transfer agents and web caches.
2127 =item B<ValuesAbsolute> B<true>|B<false>
2129 Enables or disables reporting of free and used disk space in 1K-blocks.
2130 Defaults to B<true>.
2132 =item B<ValuesPercentage> B<false>|B<true>
2134 Enables or disables reporting of free and used disk space in percentage.
2135 Defaults to B<false>.
2137 This is useful for deploying I<collectd> on the cloud, where machines with
2138 different disk size may exist. Then it is more practical to configure
2139 thresholds based on relative disk size.
2141 =back
2143 =head2 Plugin C<disk>
2145 The C<disk> plugin collects information about the usage of physical disks and
2146 logical disks (partitions). Values collected are the number of octets written
2147 to and read from a disk or partition, the number of read/write operations
2148 issued to the disk and a rather complex "time" it took for these commands to be
2149 issued.
2151 Using the following two options you can ignore some disks or configure the
2152 collection only of specific disks.
2154 =over 4
2156 =item B<Disk> I<Name>
2158 Select the disk I<Name>. Whether it is collected or ignored depends on the
2159 B<IgnoreSelected> setting, see below. As with other plugins that use the
2160 daemon's ignorelist functionality, a string that starts and ends with a slash
2161 is interpreted as a regular expression. Examples:
2163 Disk "sdd"
2164 Disk "/hda[34]/"
2166 =item B<IgnoreSelected> B<true>|B<false>
2168 Sets whether selected disks, i.E<nbsp>e. the ones matches by any of the B<Disk>
2169 statements, are ignored or if all other disks are ignored. The behavior
2170 (hopefully) is intuitive: If no B<Disk> option is configured, all disks are
2171 collected. If at least one B<Disk> option is given and no B<IgnoreSelected> or
2172 set to B<false>, B<only> matching disks will be collected. If B<IgnoreSelected>
2173 is set to B<true>, all disks are collected B<except> the ones matched.
2175 =item B<UseBSDName> B<true>|B<false>
2177 Whether to use the device's "BSD Name", on MacE<nbsp>OSE<nbsp>X, instead of the
2178 default major/minor numbers. Requires collectd to be built with Apple's
2179 IOKitLib support.
2181 =item B<UdevNameAttr> I<Attribute>
2183 Attempt to override disk instance name with the value of a specified udev
2184 attribute when built with B<libudev>. If the attribute is not defined for the
2185 given device, the default name is used. Example:
2187 UdevNameAttr "DM_NAME"
2189 =back
2191 =head2 Plugin C<dns>
2193 =over 4
2195 =item B<Interface> I<Interface>
2197 The dns plugin uses B<libpcap> to capture dns traffic and analyzes it. This
2198 option sets the interface that should be used. If this option is not set, or
2199 set to "any", the plugin will try to get packets from B<all> interfaces. This
2200 may not work on certain platforms, such as MacE<nbsp>OSE<nbsp>X.
2202 =item B<IgnoreSource> I<IP-address>
2204 Ignore packets that originate from this address.
2206 =item B<SelectNumericQueryTypes> B<true>|B<false>
2208 Enabled by default, collects unknown (and thus presented as numeric only) query types.
2210 =back
2212 =head2 Plugin C<email>
2214 =over 4
2216 =item B<SocketFile> I<Path>
2218 Sets the socket-file which is to be created.
2220 =item B<SocketGroup> I<Group>
2222 If running as root change the group of the UNIX-socket after it has been
2223 created. Defaults to B<collectd>.
2225 =item B<SocketPerms> I<Permissions>
2227 Change the file permissions of the UNIX-socket after it has been created. The
2228 permissions must be given as a numeric, octal value as you would pass to
2229 L<chmod(1)>. Defaults to B<0770>.
2231 =item B<MaxConns> I<Number>
2233 Sets the maximum number of connections that can be handled in parallel. Since
2234 this many threads will be started immediately setting this to a very high
2235 value will waste valuable resources. Defaults to B<5> and will be forced to be
2236 at most B<16384> to prevent typos and dumb mistakes.
2238 =back
2240 =head2 Plugin C<ethstat>
2242 The I<ethstat plugin> collects information about network interface cards (NICs)
2243 by talking directly with the underlying kernel driver using L<ioctl(2)>.
2245 B<Synopsis:>
2247 <Plugin "ethstat">
2248 Interface "eth0"
2249 Map "rx_csum_offload_errors" "if_rx_errors" "checksum_offload"
2250 Map "multicast" "if_multicast"
2251 </Plugin>
2253 B<Options:>
2255 =over 4
2257 =item B<Interface> I<Name>
2259 Collect statistical information about interface I<Name>.
2261 =item B<Map> I<Name> I<Type> [I<TypeInstance>]
2263 By default, the plugin will submit values as type C<derive> and I<type
2264 instance> set to I<Name>, the name of the metric as reported by the driver. If
2265 an appropriate B<Map> option exists, the given I<Type> and, optionally,
2266 I<TypeInstance> will be used.
2268 =item B<MappedOnly> B<true>|B<false>
2270 When set to B<true>, only metrics that can be mapped to to a I<type> will be
2271 collected, all other metrics will be ignored. Defaults to B<false>.
2273 =back
2275 =head2 Plugin C<exec>
2277 Please make sure to read L<collectd-exec(5)> before using this plugin. It
2278 contains valuable information on when the executable is executed and the
2279 output that is expected from it.
2281 =over 4
2283 =item B<Exec> I<User>[:[I<Group>]] I<Executable> [I<E<lt>argE<gt>> [I<E<lt>argE<gt>> ...]]
2285 =item B<NotificationExec> I<User>[:[I<Group>]] I<Executable> [I<E<lt>argE<gt>> [I<E<lt>argE<gt>> ...]]
2287 Execute the executable I<Executable> as user I<User>. If the user name is
2288 followed by a colon and a group name, the effective group is set to that group.
2289 The real group and saved-set group will be set to the default group of that
2290 user. If no group is given the effective group ID will be the same as the real
2291 group ID.
2293 Please note that in order to change the user and/or group the daemon needs
2294 superuser privileges. If the daemon is run as an unprivileged user you must
2295 specify the same user/group here. If the daemon is run with superuser
2296 privileges, you must supply a non-root user here.
2298 The executable may be followed by optional arguments that are passed to the
2299 program. Please note that due to the configuration parsing numbers and boolean
2300 values may be changed. If you want to be absolutely sure that something is
2301 passed as-is please enclose it in quotes.
2303 The B<Exec> and B<NotificationExec> statements change the semantics of the
2304 programs executed, i.E<nbsp>e. the data passed to them and the response
2305 expected from them. This is documented in great detail in L<collectd-exec(5)>.
2307 =back
2309 =head2 Plugin C<fhcount>
2311 The C<fhcount> plugin provides statistics about used, unused and total number of
2312 file handles on Linux.
2314 The I<fhcount plugin> provides the following configuration options:
2316 =over 4
2318 =item B<ValuesAbsolute> B<true>|B<false>
2320 Enables or disables reporting of file handles usage in absolute numbers,
2321 e.g. file handles used. Defaults to B<true>.
2323 =item B<ValuesPercentage> B<false>|B<true>
2325 Enables or disables reporting of file handles usage in percentages, e.g.
2326 percent of file handles used. Defaults to B<false>.
2328 =back
2330 =head2 Plugin C<filecount>
2332 The C<filecount> plugin counts the number of files in a certain directory (and
2333 its subdirectories) and their combined size. The configuration is very straight
2334 forward:
2336 <Plugin "filecount">
2337 <Directory "/var/qmail/queue/mess">
2338 Instance "qmail-message"
2339 </Directory>
2340 <Directory "/var/qmail/queue/todo">
2341 Instance "qmail-todo"
2342 </Directory>
2343 <Directory "/var/lib/php5">
2344 Instance "php5-sessions"
2345 Name "sess_*"
2346 </Directory>
2347 </Plugin>
2349 The example above counts the number of files in QMail's queue directories and
2350 the number of PHP5 sessions. Jfiy: The "todo" queue holds the messages that
2351 QMail has not yet looked at, the "message" queue holds the messages that were
2352 classified into "local" and "remote".
2354 As you can see, the configuration consists of one or more C<Directory> blocks,
2355 each of which specifies a directory in which to count the files. Within those
2356 blocks, the following options are recognized:
2358 =over 4
2360 =item B<Instance> I<Instance>
2362 Sets the plugin instance to I<Instance>. That instance name must be unique, but
2363 it's your responsibility, the plugin doesn't check for that. If not given, the
2364 instance is set to the directory name with all slashes replaced by underscores
2365 and all leading underscores removed.
2367 =item B<Name> I<Pattern>
2369 Only count files that match I<Pattern>, where I<Pattern> is a shell-like
2370 wildcard as understood by L<fnmatch(3)>. Only the B<filename> is checked
2371 against the pattern, not the entire path. In case this makes it easier for you:
2372 This option has been named after the B<-name> parameter to L<find(1)>.
2374 =item B<MTime> I<Age>
2376 Count only files of a specific age: If I<Age> is greater than zero, only files
2377 that haven't been touched in the last I<Age> seconds are counted. If I<Age> is
2378 a negative number, this is inversed. For example, if B<-60> is specified, only
2379 files that have been modified in the last minute will be counted.
2381 The number can also be followed by a "multiplier" to easily specify a larger
2382 timespan. When given in this notation, the argument must in quoted, i.E<nbsp>e.
2383 must be passed as string. So the B<-60> could also be written as B<"-1m"> (one
2384 minute). Valid multipliers are C<s> (second), C<m> (minute), C<h> (hour), C<d>
2385 (day), C<w> (week), and C<y> (year). There is no "month" multiplier. You can
2386 also specify fractional numbers, e.E<nbsp>g. B<"0.5d"> is identical to
2387 B<"12h">.
2389 =item B<Size> I<Size>
2391 Count only files of a specific size. When I<Size> is a positive number, only
2392 files that are at least this big are counted. If I<Size> is a negative number,
2393 this is inversed, i.E<nbsp>e. only files smaller than the absolute value of
2394 I<Size> are counted.
2396 As with the B<MTime> option, a "multiplier" may be added. For a detailed
2397 description see above. Valid multipliers here are C<b> (byte), C<k> (kilobyte),
2398 C<m> (megabyte), C<g> (gigabyte), C<t> (terabyte), and C<p> (petabyte). Please
2399 note that there are 1000 bytes in a kilobyte, not 1024.
2401 =item B<Recursive> I<true>|I<false>
2403 Controls whether or not to recurse into subdirectories. Enabled by default.
2405 =item B<IncludeHidden> I<true>|I<false>
2407 Controls whether or not to include "hidden" files and directories in the count.
2408 "Hidden" files and directories are those, whose name begins with a dot.
2409 Defaults to I<false>, i.e. by default hidden files and directories are ignored.
2411 =back
2413 =head2 Plugin C<GenericJMX>
2415 The I<GenericJMX plugin> is written in I<Java> and therefore documented in
2416 L<collectd-java(5)>.
2418 =head2 Plugin C<gmond>
2420 The I<gmond> plugin received the multicast traffic sent by B<gmond>, the
2421 statistics collection daemon of Ganglia. Mappings for the standard "metrics"
2422 are built-in, custom mappings may be added via B<Metric> blocks, see below.
2424 Synopsis:
2426 <Plugin "gmond">
2427 MCReceiveFrom "239.2.11.71" "8649"
2428 <Metric "swap_total">
2429 Type "swap"
2430 TypeInstance "total"
2431 DataSource "value"
2432 </Metric>
2433 <Metric "swap_free">
2434 Type "swap"
2435 TypeInstance "free"
2436 DataSource "value"
2437 </Metric>
2438 </Plugin>
2440 The following metrics are built-in:
2442 =over 4
2444 =item *
2446 load_one, load_five, load_fifteen
2448 =item *
2450 cpu_user, cpu_system, cpu_idle, cpu_nice, cpu_wio
2452 =item *
2454 mem_free, mem_shared, mem_buffers, mem_cached, mem_total
2456 =item *
2458 bytes_in, bytes_out
2460 =item *
2462 pkts_in, pkts_out
2464 =back
2466 Available configuration options:
2468 =over 4
2470 =item B<MCReceiveFrom> I<MCGroup> [I<Port>]
2472 Sets sets the multicast group and UDP port to which to subscribe.
2474 Default: B<239.2.11.71>E<nbsp>/E<nbsp>B<8649>
2476 =item E<lt>B<Metric> I<Name>E<gt>
2478 These blocks add a new metric conversion to the internal table. I<Name>, the
2479 string argument to the B<Metric> block, is the metric name as used by Ganglia.
2481 =over 4
2483 =item B<Type> I<Type>
2485 Type to map this metric to. Required.
2487 =item B<TypeInstance> I<Instance>
2489 Type-instance to use. Optional.
2491 =item B<DataSource> I<Name>
2493 Data source to map this metric to. If the configured type has exactly one data
2494 source, this is optional. Otherwise the option is required.
2496 =back
2498 =back
2500 =head2 Plugin C<hddtemp>
2502 To get values from B<hddtemp> collectd connects to B<localhost> (127.0.0.1),
2503 port B<7634/tcp>. The B<Host> and B<Port> options can be used to change these
2504 default values, see below. C<hddtemp> has to be running to work correctly. If
2505 C<hddtemp> is not running timeouts may appear which may interfere with other
2506 statistics..
2508 The B<hddtemp> homepage can be found at
2509 L<http://www.guzu.net/linux/hddtemp.php>.
2511 =over 4
2513 =item B<Host> I<Hostname>
2515 Hostname to connect to. Defaults to B<127.0.0.1>.
2517 =item B<Port> I<Port>
2519 TCP-Port to connect to. Defaults to B<7634>.
2521 =back
2523 =head2 Plugin C<interface>
2525 =over 4
2527 =item B<Interface> I<Interface>
2529 Select this interface. By default these interfaces will then be collected. For
2530 a more detailed description see B<IgnoreSelected> below.
2532 =item B<IgnoreSelected> I<true>|I<false>
2534 If no configuration if given, the B<interface>-plugin will collect data from
2535 all interfaces. This may not be practical, especially for loopback- and
2536 similar interfaces. Thus, you can use the B<Interface>-option to pick the
2537 interfaces you're interested in. Sometimes, however, it's easier/preferred
2538 to collect all interfaces I<except> a few ones. This option enables you to
2539 do that: By setting B<IgnoreSelected> to I<true> the effect of
2540 B<Interface> is inverted: All selected interfaces are ignored and all
2541 other interfaces are collected.
2543 It is possible to use regular expressions to match interface names, if the
2544 name is surrounded by I</.../> and collectd was compiled with support for
2545 regexps. This is useful if there's a need to collect (or ignore) data
2546 for a group of interfaces that are similarly named, without the need to
2547 explicitly list all of them (especially useful if the list is dynamic).
2548 Example:
2550 Interface "lo"
2551 Interface "/^veth/"
2552 Interface "/^tun[0-9]+/"
2553 IgnoreSelected "true"
2555 This will ignore the loopback interface, all interfaces with names starting
2556 with I<veth> and all interfaces with names starting with I<tun> followed by
2557 at least one digit.
2560 =item B<UniqueName> I<true>|I<false>
2562 Interface name is not unique on Solaris (KSTAT), interface name is unique
2563 only within a module/instance. Following tuple is considered unique:
2564 (ks_module, ks_instance, ks_name)
2565 If this option is set to true, interface name contains above three fields
2566 separated by an underscore. For more info on KSTAT, visit
2567 L<http://docs.oracle.com/cd/E23824_01/html/821-1468/kstat-3kstat.html#REFMAN3Ekstat-3kstat>
2569 This option is only available on Solaris.
2571 =back
2573 =head2 Plugin C<ipmi>
2575 =over 4
2577 =item B<Sensor> I<Sensor>
2579 Selects sensors to collect or to ignore, depending on B<IgnoreSelected>.
2581 =item B<IgnoreSelected> I<true>|I<false>
2583 If no configuration if given, the B<ipmi> plugin will collect data from all
2584 sensors found of type "temperature", "voltage", "current" and "fanspeed".
2585 This option enables you to do that: By setting B<IgnoreSelected> to I<true>
2586 the effect of B<Sensor> is inverted: All selected sensors are ignored and
2587 all other sensors are collected.
2589 =item B<NotifySensorAdd> I<true>|I<false>
2591 If a sensor appears after initialization time of a minute a notification
2592 is sent.
2594 =item B<NotifySensorRemove> I<true>|I<false>
2596 If a sensor disappears a notification is sent.
2598 =item B<NotifySensorNotPresent> I<true>|I<false>
2600 If you have for example dual power supply and one of them is (un)plugged then
2601 a notification is sent.
2603 =back
2605 =head2 Plugin C<iptables>
2607 =over 4
2609 =item B<Chain> I<Table> I<Chain> [I<Comment|Number> [I<Name>]]
2611 =item B<Chain6> I<Table> I<Chain> [I<Comment|Number> [I<Name>]]
2613 Select the iptables/ip6tables filter rules to count packets and bytes from.
2615 If only I<Table> and I<Chain> are given, this plugin will collect the counters
2616 of all rules which have a comment-match. The comment is then used as
2617 type-instance.
2619 If I<Comment> or I<Number> is given, only the rule with the matching comment or
2620 the I<n>th rule will be collected. Again, the comment (or the number) will be
2621 used as the type-instance.
2623 If I<Name> is supplied, it will be used as the type-instance instead of the
2624 comment or the number.
2626 =back
2628 =head2 Plugin C<irq>
2630 =over 4
2632 =item B<Irq> I<Irq>
2634 Select this irq. By default these irqs will then be collected. For a more
2635 detailed description see B<IgnoreSelected> below.
2637 =item B<IgnoreSelected> I<true>|I<false>
2639 If no configuration if given, the B<irq>-plugin will collect data from all
2640 irqs. This may not be practical, especially if no interrupts happen. Thus, you
2641 can use the B<Irq>-option to pick the interrupt you're interested in.
2642 Sometimes, however, it's easier/preferred to collect all interrupts I<except> a
2643 few ones. This option enables you to do that: By setting B<IgnoreSelected> to
2644 I<true> the effect of B<Irq> is inverted: All selected interrupts are ignored
2645 and all other interrupts are collected.
2647 =back
2649 =head2 Plugin C<java>
2651 The I<Java> plugin makes it possible to write extensions for collectd in Java.
2652 This section only discusses the syntax and semantic of the configuration
2653 options. For more in-depth information on the I<Java> plugin, please read
2654 L<collectd-java(5)>.
2656 Synopsis:
2658 <Plugin "java">
2659 JVMArg "-verbose:jni"
2660 JVMArg "-Djava.class.path=/opt/collectd/lib/collectd/bindings/java"
2661 LoadPlugin "org.collectd.java.Foobar"
2662 <Plugin "org.collectd.java.Foobar">
2663 # To be parsed by the plugin
2664 </Plugin>
2665 </Plugin>
2667 Available configuration options:
2669 =over 4
2671 =item B<JVMArg> I<Argument>
2673 Argument that is to be passed to the I<Java Virtual Machine> (JVM). This works
2674 exactly the way the arguments to the I<java> binary on the command line work.
2675 Execute C<javaE<nbsp>--help> for details.
2677 Please note that B<all> these options must appear B<before> (i.E<nbsp>e. above)
2678 any other options! When another option is found, the JVM will be started and
2679 later options will have to be ignored!
2681 =item B<LoadPlugin> I<JavaClass>
2683 Instantiates a new I<JavaClass> object. The constructor of this object very
2684 likely then registers one or more callback methods with the server.
2686 See L<collectd-java(5)> for details.
2688 When the first such option is found, the virtual machine (JVM) is created. This
2689 means that all B<JVMArg> options must appear before (i.E<nbsp>e. above) all
2690 B<LoadPlugin> options!
2692 =item B<Plugin> I<Name>
2694 The entire block is passed to the Java plugin as an
2695 I<org.collectd.api.OConfigItem> object.
2697 For this to work, the plugin has to register a configuration callback first,
2698 see L<collectd-java(5)/"config callback">. This means, that the B<Plugin> block
2699 must appear after the appropriate B<LoadPlugin> block. Also note, that I<Name>
2700 depends on the (Java) plugin registering the callback and is completely
2701 independent from the I<JavaClass> argument passed to B<LoadPlugin>.
2703 =back
2705 =head2 Plugin C<load>
2707 The I<Load plugin> collects the system load. These numbers give a rough overview
2708 over the utilization of a machine. The system load is defined as the number of
2709 runnable tasks in the run-queue and is provided by many operating systems as a
2710 one, five or fifteen minute average.
2712 The following configuration options are available:
2714 =over 4
2716 =item B<ReportRelative> B<false>|B<true>
2718 When enabled, system load divided by number of available CPU cores is reported
2719 for intervals 1 min, 5 min and 15 min. Defaults to false.
2721 =back
2724 =head2 Plugin C<logfile>
2726 =over 4
2728 =item B<LogLevel> B<debug|info|notice|warning|err>
2730 Sets the log-level. If, for example, set to B<notice>, then all events with
2731 severity B<notice>, B<warning>, or B<err> will be written to the logfile.
2733 Please note that B<debug> is only available if collectd has been compiled with
2734 debugging support.
2736 =item B<File> I<File>
2738 Sets the file to write log messages to. The special strings B<stdout> and
2739 B<stderr> can be used to write to the standard output and standard error
2740 channels, respectively. This, of course, only makes much sense when I<collectd>
2741 is running in foreground- or non-daemon-mode.
2743 =item B<Timestamp> B<true>|B<false>
2745 Prefix all lines printed by the current time. Defaults to B<true>.
2747 =item B<PrintSeverity> B<true>|B<false>
2749 When enabled, all lines are prefixed by the severity of the log message, for
2750 example "warning". Defaults to B<false>.
2752 =back
2754 B<Note>: There is no need to notify the daemon after moving or removing the
2755 log file (e.E<nbsp>g. when rotating the logs). The plugin reopens the file
2756 for each line it writes.
2758 =head2 Plugin C<log_logstash>
2760 The I<log logstash plugin> behaves like the logfile plugin but formats
2761 messages as JSON events for logstash to parse and input.
2763 =over 4
2765 =item B<LogLevel> B<debug|info|notice|warning|err>
2767 Sets the log-level. If, for example, set to B<notice>, then all events with
2768 severity B<notice>, B<warning>, or B<err> will be written to the logfile.
2770 Please note that B<debug> is only available if collectd has been compiled with
2771 debugging support.
2773 =item B<File> I<File>
2775 Sets the file to write log messages to. The special strings B<stdout> and
2776 B<stderr> can be used to write to the standard output and standard error
2777 channels, respectively. This, of course, only makes much sense when I<collectd>
2778 is running in foreground- or non-daemon-mode.
2780 =back
2782 B<Note>: There is no need to notify the daemon after moving or removing the
2783 log file (e.E<nbsp>g. when rotating the logs). The plugin reopens the file
2784 for each line it writes.
2786 =head2 Plugin C<lpar>
2788 The I<LPAR plugin> reads CPU statistics of I<Logical Partitions>, a
2789 virtualization technique for IBM POWER processors. It takes into account CPU
2790 time stolen from or donated to a partition, in addition to the usual user,
2791 system, I/O statistics.
2793 The following configuration options are available:
2795 =over 4
2797 =item B<CpuPoolStats> B<false>|B<true>
2799 When enabled, statistics about the processor pool are read, too. The partition
2800 needs to have pool authority in order to be able to acquire this information.
2801 Defaults to false.
2803 =item B<ReportBySerial> B<false>|B<true>
2805 If enabled, the serial of the physical machine the partition is currently
2806 running on is reported as I<hostname> and the logical hostname of the machine
2807 is reported in the I<plugin instance>. Otherwise, the logical hostname will be
2808 used (just like other plugins) and the I<plugin instance> will be empty.
2809 Defaults to false.
2811 =back
2813 =head2 Plugin C<mbmon>
2815 The C<mbmon plugin> uses mbmon to retrieve temperature, voltage, etc.
2817 Be default collectd connects to B<localhost> (127.0.0.1), port B<411/tcp>. The
2818 B<Host> and B<Port> options can be used to change these values, see below.
2819 C<mbmon> has to be running to work correctly. If C<mbmon> is not running
2820 timeouts may appear which may interfere with other statistics..
2822 C<mbmon> must be run with the -r option ("print TAG and Value format");
2823 Debian's F</etc/init.d/mbmon> script already does this, other people
2824 will need to ensure that this is the case.
2826 =over 4
2828 =item B<Host> I<Hostname>
2830 Hostname to connect to. Defaults to B<127.0.0.1>.
2832 =item B<Port> I<Port>
2834 TCP-Port to connect to. Defaults to B<411>.
2836 =back
2838 =head2 Plugin C<md>
2840 The C<md plugin> collects information from Linux Software-RAID devices (md).
2842 All reported values are of the type C<md_disks>. Reported type instances are
2843 I<active>, I<failed> (present but not operational), I<spare> (hot stand-by) and
2844 I<missing> (physically absent) disks.
2846 =over 4
2848 =item B<Device> I<Device>
2850 Select md devices based on device name. The I<device name> is the basename of
2851 the device, i.e. the name of the block device without the leading C</dev/>.
2852 See B<IgnoreSelected> for more details.
2854 =item B<IgnoreSelected> B<true>|B<false>
2856 Invert device selection: If set to B<true>, all md devices B<except> those
2857 listed using B<Device> are collected. If B<false> (the default), only those
2858 listed are collected. If no configuration is given, the B<md> plugin will
2859 collect data from all md devices.
2861 =back
2863 =head2 Plugin C<memcachec>
2865 The C<memcachec plugin> connects to a memcached server, queries one or more
2866 given I<pages> and parses the returned data according to user specification.
2867 The I<matches> used are the same as the matches used in the C<curl> and C<tail>
2868 plugins.
2870 In order to talk to the memcached server, this plugin uses the I<libmemcached>
2871 library. Please note that there is another library with a very similar name,
2872 libmemcache (notice the missing `d'), which is not applicable.
2874 Synopsis of the configuration:
2876 <Plugin "memcachec">
2877 <Page "plugin_instance">
2878 Server "localhost"
2879 Key "page_key"
2880 <Match>
2881 Regex "(\\d+) bytes sent"
2882 DSType CounterAdd
2883 Type "ipt_octets"
2884 Instance "type_instance"
2885 </Match>
2886 </Page>
2887 </Plugin>
2889 The configuration options are:
2891 =over 4
2893 =item E<lt>B<Page> I<Name>E<gt>
2895 Each B<Page> block defines one I<page> to be queried from the memcached server.
2896 The block requires one string argument which is used as I<plugin instance>.
2898 =item B<Server> I<Address>
2900 Sets the server address to connect to when querying the page. Must be inside a
2901 B<Page> block.
2903 =item B<Key> I<Key>
2905 When connected to the memcached server, asks for the page I<Key>.
2907 =item E<lt>B<Match>E<gt>
2909 Match blocks define which strings to look for and how matches substrings are
2910 interpreted. For a description of match blocks, please see L<"Plugin tail">.
2912 =back
2914 =head2 Plugin C<memcached>
2916 The B<memcached plugin> connects to a memcached server and queries statistics
2917 about cache utilization, memory and bandwidth used.
2918 L<http://www.danga.com/memcached/>
2920 <Plugin "memcached">
2921 <Instance "name">
2922 Host "memcache.example.com"
2923 Port 11211
2924 </Instance>
2925 </Plugin>
2927 The plugin configuration consists of one or more B<Instance> blocks which
2928 specify one I<memcached> connection each. Within the B<Instance> blocks, the
2929 following options are allowed:
2931 =over 4
2933 =item B<Host> I<Hostname>
2935 Hostname to connect to. Defaults to B<127.0.0.1>.
2937 =item B<Port> I<Port>
2939 TCP-Port to connect to. Defaults to B<11211>.
2941 =item B<Socket> I<Path>
2943 Connect to I<memcached> using the UNIX domain socket at I<Path>. If this
2944 setting is given, the B<Host> and B<Port> settings are ignored.
2946 =back
2948 =head2 Plugin C<mic>
2950 The B<mic plugin> gathers CPU statistics, memory usage and temperatures from
2951 Intel's Many Integrated Core (MIC) systems.
2953 B<Synopsis:>
2955 <Plugin mic>
2956 ShowCPU true
2957 ShowCPUCores true
2958 ShowMemory true
2960 ShowTemperatures true
2961 Temperature vddg
2962 Temperature vddq
2963 IgnoreSelectedTemperature true
2965 ShowPower true
2966 Power total0
2967 Power total1
2968 IgnoreSelectedPower true
2969 </Plugin>
2971 The following options are valid inside the B<PluginE<nbsp>mic> block:
2973 =over 4
2975 =item B<ShowCPU> B<true>|B<false>
2977 If enabled (the default) a sum of the CPU usage across all cores is reported.
2979 =item B<ShowCPUCores> B<true>|B<false>
2981 If enabled (the default) per-core CPU usage is reported.
2983 =item B<ShowMemory> B<true>|B<false>
2985 If enabled (the default) the physical memory usage of the MIC system is
2986 reported.
2988 =item B<ShowTemperatures> B<true>|B<false>
2990 If enabled (the default) various temperatures of the MIC system are reported.
2992 =item B<Temperature> I<Name>
2994 This option controls which temperatures are being reported. Whether matching
2995 temperatures are being ignored or I<only> matching temperatures are reported
2996 depends on the B<IgnoreSelectedTemperature> setting below. By default I<all>
2997 temperatures are reported.
2999 =item B<IgnoreSelectedTemperature> B<false>|B<true>
3001 Controls the behavior of the B<Temperature> setting above. If set to B<false>
3002 (the default) only temperatures matching a B<Temperature> option are reported
3003 or, if no B<Temperature> option is specified, all temperatures are reported. If
3004 set to B<true>, matching temperatures are I<ignored> and all other temperatures
3005 are reported.
3007 Known temperature names are:
3009 =over 4
3011 =item die
3013 Die of the CPU
3015 =item devmem
3017 Device Memory
3019 =item fin
3021 Fan In
3023 =item fout
3025 Fan Out
3027 =item vccp
3029 Voltage ccp
3031 =item vddg
3033 Voltage ddg
3035 =item vddq
3037 Voltage ddq
3039 =back
3041 =item B<ShowPower> B<true>|B<false>
3043 If enabled (the default) various temperatures of the MIC system are reported.
3045 =item B<Power> I<Name>
3047 This option controls which power readings are being reported. Whether matching
3048 power readings are being ignored or I<only> matching power readings are reported
3049 depends on the B<IgnoreSelectedPower> setting below. By default I<all>
3050 power readings are reported.
3052 =item B<IgnoreSelectedPower> B<false>|B<true>
3054 Controls the behavior of the B<Power> setting above. If set to B<false>
3055 (the default) only power readings matching a B<Power> option are reported
3056 or, if no B<Power> option is specified, all power readings are reported. If
3057 set to B<true>, matching power readings are I<ignored> and all other power readings
3058 are reported.
3060 Known power names are:
3062 =over 4
3064 =item total0
3066 Total power utilization averaged over Time Window 0 (uWatts).
3068 =item total1
3070 Total power utilization averaged over Time Window 0 (uWatts).
3072 =item inst
3074 Instantaneous power (uWatts).
3076 =item imax
3078 Max instantaneous power (uWatts).
3080 =item pcie
3082 PCI-E connector power (uWatts).
3084 =item c2x3
3086 2x3 connector power (uWatts).
3088 =item c2x4
3090 2x4 connector power (uWatts).
3092 =item vccp
3094 Core rail (uVolts).
3096 =item vddg
3098 Uncore rail (uVolts).
3100 =item vddq
3102 Memory subsystem rail (uVolts).
3104 =back
3106 =back
3108 =head2 Plugin C<memory>
3110 The I<memory plugin> provides the following configuration options:
3112 =over 4
3114 =item B<ValuesAbsolute> B<true>|B<false>
3116 Enables or disables reporting of physical memory usage in absolute numbers,
3117 i.e. bytes. Defaults to B<true>.
3119 =item B<ValuesPercentage> B<false>|B<true>
3121 Enables or disables reporting of physical memory usage in percentages, e.g.
3122 percent of physical memory used. Defaults to B<false>.
3124 This is useful for deploying I<collectd> in a heterogeneous environment in
3125 which the sizes of physical memory vary.
3127 =back
3129 =head2 Plugin C<modbus>
3131 The B<modbus plugin> connects to a Modbus "slave" via Modbus/TCP or Modbus/RTU and
3132 reads register values. It supports reading single registers (unsigned 16E<nbsp>bit
3133 values), large integer values (unsigned 32E<nbsp>bit values) and floating point
3134 values (two registers interpreted as IEEE floats in big endian notation).
3136 B<Synopsis:>
3138 <Data "voltage-input-1">
3139 RegisterBase 0
3140 RegisterType float
3141 RegisterCmd ReadHolding
3142 Type voltage
3143 Instance "input-1"
3144 </Data>
3146 <Data "voltage-input-2">
3147 RegisterBase 2
3148 RegisterType float
3149 RegisterCmd ReadHolding
3150 Type voltage
3151 Instance "input-2"
3152 </Data>
3154 <Data "supply-temperature-1">
3155 RegisterBase 0
3156 RegisterType Int16
3157 RegisterCmd ReadHolding
3158 Type temperature
3159 Instance "temp-1"
3160 </Data>
3162 <Host "modbus.example.com">
3163 Address "192.168.0.42"
3164 Port "502"
3165 Interval 60
3167 <Slave 1>
3168 Instance "power-supply"
3169 Collect "voltage-input-1"
3170 Collect "voltage-input-2"
3171 </Slave>
3172 </Host>
3174 <Host "localhost">
3175 Device "/dev/ttyUSB0"
3176 Baudrate 38400
3177 Interval 20
3179 <Slave 1>
3180 Instance "temperature"
3181 Collect "supply-temperature-1"
3182 </Slave>
3183 </Host>
3185 =over 4
3187 =item E<lt>B<Data> I<Name>E<gt> blocks
3189 Data blocks define a mapping between register numbers and the "types" used by
3190 I<collectd>.
3192 Within E<lt>DataE<nbsp>/E<gt> blocks, the following options are allowed:
3194 =over 4
3196 =item B<RegisterBase> I<Number>
3198 Configures the base register to read from the device. If the option
3199 B<RegisterType> has been set to B<Uint32> or B<Float>, this and the next
3200 register will be read (the register number is increased by one).
3202 =item B<RegisterType> B<Int16>|B<Int32>|B<Uint16>|B<Uint32>|B<Float>
3204 Specifies what kind of data is returned by the device. If the type is B<Int32>,
3205 B<Uint32> or B<Float>, two 16E<nbsp>bit registers will be read and the data is
3206 combined into one value. Defaults to B<Uint16>.
3208 =item B<RegisterCmd> B<ReadHolding>|B<ReadInput>
3210 Specifies register type to be collected from device. Works only with libmodbus
3211 2.9.2 or higher. Defaults to B<ReadHolding>.
3213 =item B<Type> I<Type>
3215 Specifies the "type" (data set) to use when dispatching the value to
3216 I<collectd>. Currently, only data sets with exactly one data source are
3217 supported.
3219 =item B<Instance> I<Instance>
3221 Sets the type instance to use when dispatching the value to I<collectd>. If
3222 unset, an empty string (no type instance) is used.
3224 =back
3226 =item E<lt>B<Host> I<Name>E<gt> blocks
3228 Host blocks are used to specify to which hosts to connect and what data to read
3229 from their "slaves". The string argument I<Name> is used as hostname when
3230 dispatching the values to I<collectd>.
3232 Within E<lt>HostE<nbsp>/E<gt> blocks, the following options are allowed:
3234 =over 4
3236 =item B<Address> I<Hostname>
3238 For Modbus/TCP, specifies the node name (the actual network address) used to
3239 connect to the host. This may be an IP address or a hostname. Please note that
3240 the used I<libmodbus> library only supports IPv4 at the moment.
3242 =item B<Port> I<Service>
3244 for Modbus/TCP, specifies the port used to connect to the host. The port can
3245 either be given as a number or as a service name. Please note that the
3246 I<Service> argument must be a string, even if ports are given in their numerical
3247 form. Defaults to "502".
3249 =item B<Device> I<Devicenode>
3251 For Modbus/RTU, specifies the path to the serial device being used.
3253 =item B<Baudrate> I<Baudrate>
3255 For Modbus/RTU, specifies the baud rate of the serial device.
3256 Note, connections currently support only 8/N/1.
3258 =item B<Interval> I<Interval>
3260 Sets the interval (in seconds) in which the values will be collected from this
3261 host. By default the global B<Interval> setting will be used.
3263 =item E<lt>B<Slave> I<ID>E<gt>
3265 Over each connection, multiple Modbus devices may be reached. The slave ID
3266 is used to specify which device should be addressed. For each device you want
3267 to query, one B<Slave> block must be given.
3269 Within E<lt>SlaveE<nbsp>/E<gt> blocks, the following options are allowed:
3271 =over 4
3273 =item B<Instance> I<Instance>
3275 Specify the plugin instance to use when dispatching the values to I<collectd>.
3276 By default "slave_I<ID>" is used.
3278 =item B<Collect> I<DataName>
3280 Specifies which data to retrieve from the device. I<DataName> must be the same
3281 string as the I<Name> argument passed to a B<Data> block. You can specify this
3282 option multiple times to collect more than one value from a slave. At least one
3283 B<Collect> option is mandatory.
3285 =back
3287 =back
3289 =back
3291 =head2 Plugin C<mqtt>
3293 The I<MQTT plugin> can send metrics to MQTT (B<Publish> blocks) and receive
3294 values from MQTT (B<Subscribe> blocks).
3296 B<Synopsis:>
3298 <Plugin mqtt>
3299 <Publish "name">
3300 Host "mqtt.example.com"
3301 Prefix "collectd"
3302 </Publish>
3303 <Subscribe "name">
3304 Host "mqtt.example.com"
3305 Topic "collectd/#"
3306 </Subscribe>
3307 </Plugin>
3309 The plugin's configuration is in B<Publish> and/or B<Subscribe> blocks,
3310 configuring the sending and receiving direction respectively. The plugin will
3311 register a write callback named C<mqtt/I<name>> where I<name> is the string
3312 argument given to the B<Publish> block. Both types of blocks share many but not
3313 all of the following options. If an option is valid in only one of the blocks,
3314 it will be mentioned explicitly.
3316 B<Options:>
3318 =over 4
3320 =item B<Host> I<Hostname>
3322 Hostname of the MQTT broker to connect to.
3324 =item B<Port> I<Service>
3326 Port number or service name of the MQTT broker to connect to.
3328 =item B<User> I<UserName>
3330 Username used when authenticating to the MQTT broker.
3332 =item B<Password> I<Password>
3334 Password used when authenticating to the MQTT broker.
3336 =item B<ClientId> I<ClientId>
3338 MQTT client ID to use. Defaults to the hostname used by I<collectd>.
3340 =item B<QoS> [B<0>-B<2>]
3342 Sets the I<Quality of Service>, with the values C<0>, C<1> and C<2> meaning:
3344 =over 4
3346 =item B<0>
3348 At most once
3350 =item B<1>
3352 At least once
3354 =item B<2>
3356 Exactly once
3358 =back
3360 In B<Publish> blocks, this option determines the QoS flag set on outgoing
3361 messages and defaults to B<0>. In B<Subscribe> blocks, determines the maximum
3362 QoS setting the client is going to accept and defaults to B<2>. If the QoS flag
3363 on a message is larger than the maximum accepted QoS of a subscriber, the
3364 message's QoS will be downgraded.
3366 =item B<Prefix> I<Prefix> (Publish only)
3368 This plugin will use one topic per I<value list> which will looks like a path.
3369 I<Prefix> is used as the first path element and defaults to B<collectd>.
3371 An example topic name would be:
3373 collectd/cpu-0/cpu-user
3375 =item B<Retain> B<false>|B<true> (Publish only)
3377 Controls whether the MQTT broker will retain (keep a copy of) the last message
3378 sent to each topic and deliver it to new subscribers. Defaults to B<false>.
3380 =item B<StoreRates> B<true>|B<false> (Publish only)
3382 Controls whether C<DERIVE> and C<COUNTER> metrics are converted to a I<rate>
3383 before sending. Defaults to B<true>.
3385 =item B<CleanSession> B<true>|B<false> (Subscribe only)
3387 Controls whether the MQTT "cleans" the session up after the subscriber
3388 disconnects or if it maintains the subscriber's subscriptions and all messages
3389 that arrive while the subscriber is disconnected. Defaults to B<true>.
3391 =item B<Topic> I<TopicName> (Subscribe only)
3393 Configures the topic(s) to subscribe to. You can use the single level C<+> and
3394 multi level C<#> wildcards. Defaults to B<collectd/#>, i.e. all topics beneath
3395 the B<collectd> branch.
3397 =item B<CACert> I<file>
3399 Path to the PEM-encoded CA certificate file. Setting this option enables TLS
3400 communication with the MQTT broker, and as such, B<Port> should be the TLS-enabled
3401 port of the MQTT broker.
3402 A valid TLS configuration requires B<CACert>, B<CertificateFile> and B<CertificateKeyFile>.
3404 =item B<CertificateFile> I<file>
3406 Path to the PEM-encoded certificate file to use as client certificate when
3407 connecting to the MQTT broker.
3408 A valid TLS configuration requires B<CACert>, B<CertificateFile> and B<CertificateKeyFile>.
3410 =item B<CertificateKeyFile> I<file>
3412 Path to the unencrypted PEM-encoded key file corresponding to B<CertificateFile>.
3413 A valid TLS configuration requires B<CACert>, B<CertificateFile> and B<CertificateKeyFile>.
3415 =item B<TLSProtocol> I<protocol>
3417 If configured, this specifies the string protocol version (e.g. C<tlsv1>,
3418 C<tlsv1.2>) to use for the TLS connection to the broker. If not set a default
3419 version is used which depends on the version of OpenSSL the Mosquitto library
3420 was linked against.
3422 =item B<CipherSuite> I<ciphersuite>
3424 A string describing the ciphers available for use. See L<ciphers(1)> and the
3425 C<openssl ciphers> utility for more information. If unset, the default ciphers
3426 will be used.
3429 =back
3431 =head2 Plugin C<mysql>
3433 The C<mysql plugin> requires B<mysqlclient> to be installed. It connects to
3434 one or more databases when started and keeps the connection up as long as
3435 possible. When the connection is interrupted for whatever reason it will try
3436 to re-connect. The plugin will complain loudly in case anything goes wrong.
3438 This plugin issues the MySQL C<SHOW STATUS> / C<SHOW GLOBAL STATUS> command
3439 and collects information about MySQL network traffic, executed statements,
3440 requests, the query cache and threads by evaluating the
3441 C<Bytes_{received,sent}>, C<Com_*>, C<Handler_*>, C<Qcache_*> and C<Threads_*>
3442 return values. Please refer to the B<MySQL reference manual>, I<5.1.6. Server
3443 Status Variables> for an explanation of these values.
3445 Optionally, master and slave statistics may be collected in a MySQL
3446 replication setup. In that case, information about the synchronization state
3447 of the nodes are collected by evaluating the C<Position> return value of the
3448 C<SHOW MASTER STATUS> command and the C<Seconds_Behind_Master>,
3449 C<Read_Master_Log_Pos> and C<Exec_Master_Log_Pos> return values of the
3450 C<SHOW SLAVE STATUS> command. See the B<MySQL reference manual>,
3451 I<12.5.5.21 SHOW MASTER STATUS Syntax> and
3452 I<12.5.5.31 SHOW SLAVE STATUS Syntax> for details.
3454 Synopsis:
3456 <Plugin mysql>
3457 <Database foo>
3458 Host "hostname"
3459 User "username"
3460 Password "password"
3461 Port "3306"
3462 MasterStats true
3463 ConnectTimeout 10
3464 </Database>
3466 <Database bar>
3467 Alias "squeeze"
3468 Host "localhost"
3469 Socket "/var/run/mysql/mysqld.sock"
3470 SlaveStats true
3471 SlaveNotifications true
3472 </Database>
3473 </Plugin>
3475 A B<Database> block defines one connection to a MySQL database. It accepts a
3476 single argument which specifies the name of the database. None of the other
3477 options are required. MySQL will use default values as documented in the
3478 section "mysql_real_connect()" in the B<MySQL reference manual>.
3480 =over 4
3482 =item B<Alias> I<Alias>
3484 Alias to use as sender instead of hostname when reporting. This may be useful
3485 when having cryptic hostnames.
3487 =item B<Host> I<Hostname>
3489 Hostname of the database server. Defaults to B<localhost>.
3491 =item B<User> I<Username>
3493 Username to use when connecting to the database. The user does not have to be
3494 granted any privileges (which is synonym to granting the C<USAGE> privilege),
3495 unless you want to collectd replication statistics (see B<MasterStats> and
3496 B<SlaveStats> below). In this case, the user needs the C<REPLICATION CLIENT>
3497 (or C<SUPER>) privileges. Else, any existing MySQL user will do.
3499 =item B<Password> I<Password>
3501 Password needed to log into the database.
3503 =item B<Database> I<Database>
3505 Select this database. Defaults to I<no database> which is a perfectly reasonable
3506 option for what this plugin does.
3508 =item B<Port> I<Port>
3510 TCP-port to connect to. The port must be specified in its numeric form, but it
3511 must be passed as a string nonetheless. For example:
3513 Port "3306"
3515 If B<Host> is set to B<localhost> (the default), this setting has no effect.
3516 See the documentation for the C<mysql_real_connect> function for details.
3518 =item B<Socket> I<Socket>
3520 Specifies the path to the UNIX domain socket of the MySQL server. This option
3521 only has any effect, if B<Host> is set to B<localhost> (the default).
3522 Otherwise, use the B<Port> option above. See the documentation for the
3523 C<mysql_real_connect> function for details.
3525 =item B<InnodbStats> I<true|false>
3527 If enabled, metrics about the InnoDB storage engine are collected.
3528 Disabled by default.
3530 =item B<MasterStats> I<true|false>
3532 =item B<SlaveStats> I<true|false>
3534 Enable the collection of master / slave statistics in a replication setup. In
3535 order to be able to get access to these statistics, the user needs special
3536 privileges. See the B<User> documentation above. Defaults to B<false>.
3538 =item B<SlaveNotifications> I<true|false>
3540 If enabled, the plugin sends a notification if the replication slave I/O and /
3541 or SQL threads are not running. Defaults to B<false>.
3543 =item B<ConnectTimeout> I<Seconds>
3545 Sets the connect timeout for the MySQL client.
3547 =back
3549 =head2 Plugin C<netapp>
3551 The netapp plugin can collect various performance and capacity information
3552 from a NetApp filer using the NetApp API.
3554 Please note that NetApp has a wide line of products and a lot of different
3555 software versions for each of these products. This plugin was developed for a
3556 NetApp FAS3040 running OnTap 7.2.3P8 and tested on FAS2050 7.3.1.1L1,
3557 FAS3140 7.2.5.1 and FAS3020 7.2.4P9. It I<should> work for most combinations of
3558 model and software version but it is very hard to test this.
3559 If you have used this plugin with other models and/or software version, feel
3560 free to send us a mail to tell us about the results, even if it's just a short
3561 "It works".
3563 To collect these data collectd will log in to the NetApp via HTTP(S) and HTTP
3564 basic authentication.
3566 B<Do not use a regular user for this!> Create a special collectd user with just
3567 the minimum of capabilities needed. The user only needs the "login-http-admin"
3568 capability as well as a few more depending on which data will be collected.
3569 Required capabilities are documented below.
3571 =head3 Synopsis
3573 <Plugin "netapp">
3574 <Host "netapp1.example.com">
3575 Protocol "https"
3576 Address "10.0.0.1"
3577 Port 443
3578 User "username"
3579 Password "aef4Aebe"
3580 Interval 30
3582 <WAFL>
3583 Interval 30
3584 GetNameCache true
3585 GetDirCache true
3586 GetBufferCache true
3587 GetInodeCache true
3588 </WAFL>
3590 <Disks>
3591 Interval 30
3592 GetBusy true
3593 </Disks>
3595 <VolumePerf>
3596 Interval 30
3597 GetIO "volume0"
3598 IgnoreSelectedIO false
3599 GetOps "volume0"
3600 IgnoreSelectedOps false
3601 GetLatency "volume0"
3602 IgnoreSelectedLatency false
3603 </VolumePerf>
3605 <VolumeUsage>
3606 Interval 30
3607 GetCapacity "vol0"
3608 GetCapacity "vol1"
3609 IgnoreSelectedCapacity false
3610 GetSnapshot "vol1"
3611 GetSnapshot "vol3"
3612 IgnoreSelectedSnapshot false
3613 </VolumeUsage>
3615 <Quota>
3616 Interval 60
3617 </Quota>
3619 <Snapvault>
3620 Interval 30
3621 </Snapvault>
3623 <System>
3624 Interval 30
3625 GetCPULoad true
3626 GetInterfaces true
3627 GetDiskOps true
3628 GetDiskIO true
3629 </System>
3631 <VFiler vfilerA>
3632 Interval 60
3634 SnapVault true
3635 # ...
3636 </VFiler>
3637 </Host>
3638 </Plugin>
3640 The netapp plugin accepts the following configuration options:
3642 =over 4
3644 =item B<Host> I<Name>
3646 A host block defines one NetApp filer. It will appear in collectd with the name
3647 you specify here which does not have to be its real name nor its hostname (see
3648 the B<Address> option below).
3650 =item B<VFiler> I<Name>
3652 A B<VFiler> block may only be used inside a host block. It accepts all the
3653 same options as the B<Host> block (except for cascaded B<VFiler> blocks) and
3654 will execute all NetApp API commands in the context of the specified
3655 VFiler(R). It will appear in collectd with the name you specify here which
3656 does not have to be its real name. The VFiler name may be specified using the
3657 B<VFilerName> option. If this is not specified, it will default to the name
3658 you specify here.
3660 The VFiler block inherits all connection related settings from the surrounding
3661 B<Host> block (which appear before the B<VFiler> block) but they may be
3662 overwritten inside the B<VFiler> block.
3664 This feature is useful, for example, when using a VFiler as SnapVault target
3665 (supported since OnTap 8.1). In that case, the SnapVault statistics are not
3666 available in the host filer (vfiler0) but only in the respective VFiler
3667 context.
3669 =item B<Protocol> B<httpd>|B<http>
3671 The protocol collectd will use to query this host.
3673 Optional
3675 Type: string
3677 Default: https
3679 Valid options: http, https
3681 =item B<Address> I<Address>
3683 The hostname or IP address of the host.
3685 Optional
3687 Type: string
3689 Default: The "host" block's name.
3691 =item B<Port> I<Port>
3693 The TCP port to connect to on the host.
3695 Optional
3697 Type: integer
3699 Default: 80 for protocol "http", 443 for protocol "https"
3701 =item B<User> I<User>
3703 =item B<Password> I<Password>
3705 The username and password to use to login to the NetApp.
3707 Mandatory
3709 Type: string
3711 =item B<VFilerName> I<Name>
3713 The name of the VFiler in which context to execute API commands. If not
3714 specified, the name provided to the B<VFiler> block will be used instead.
3716 Optional
3718 Type: string
3720 Default: name of the B<VFiler> block
3722 B<Note:> This option may only be used inside B<VFiler> blocks.
3724 =item B<Interval> I<Interval>
3726 B<TODO>
3728 =back
3730 The following options decide what kind of data will be collected. You can
3731 either use them as a block and fine tune various parameters inside this block,
3732 use them as a single statement to just accept all default values, or omit it to
3733 not collect any data.
3735 The following options are valid inside all blocks:
3737 =over 4
3739 =item B<Interval> I<Seconds>
3741 Collect the respective statistics every I<Seconds> seconds. Defaults to the
3742 host specific setting.
3744 =back
3746 =head3 The System block
3748 This will collect various performance data about the whole system.
3750 B<Note:> To get this data the collectd user needs the
3751 "api-perf-object-get-instances" capability.
3753 =over 4
3755 =item B<Interval> I<Seconds>
3757 Collect disk statistics every I<Seconds> seconds.
3759 =item B<GetCPULoad> B<true>|B<false>
3761 If you set this option to true the current CPU usage will be read. This will be
3762 the average usage between all CPUs in your NetApp without any information about
3763 individual CPUs.
3765 B<Note:> These are the same values that the NetApp CLI command "sysstat"
3766 returns in the "CPU" field.
3768 Optional
3770 Type: boolean
3772 Default: true
3774 Result: Two value lists of type "cpu", and type instances "idle" and "system".
3776 =item B<GetInterfaces> B<true>|B<false>
3778 If you set this option to true the current traffic of the network interfaces
3779 will be read. This will be the total traffic over all interfaces of your NetApp
3780 without any information about individual interfaces.
3782 B<Note:> This is the same values that the NetApp CLI command "sysstat" returns
3783 in the "Net kB/s" field.
3785 B<Or is it?>
3787 Optional
3789 Type: boolean
3791 Default: true
3793 Result: One value list of type "if_octects".
3795 =item B<GetDiskIO> B<true>|B<false>
3797 If you set this option to true the current IO throughput will be read. This
3798 will be the total IO of your NetApp without any information about individual
3799 disks, volumes or aggregates.
3801 B<Note:> This is the same values that the NetApp CLI command "sysstat" returns
3802 in the "DiskE<nbsp>kB/s" field.
3804 Optional
3806 Type: boolean
3808 Default: true
3810 Result: One value list of type "disk_octets".
3812 =item B<GetDiskOps> B<true>|B<false>
3814 If you set this option to true the current number of HTTP, NFS, CIFS, FCP,
3815 iSCSI, etc. operations will be read. This will be the total number of
3816 operations on your NetApp without any information about individual volumes or
3817 aggregates.
3819 B<Note:> These are the same values that the NetApp CLI command "sysstat"
3820 returns in the "NFS", "CIFS", "HTTP", "FCP" and "iSCSI" fields.
3822 Optional
3824 Type: boolean
3826 Default: true
3828 Result: A variable number of value lists of type "disk_ops_complex". Each type
3829 of operation will result in one value list with the name of the operation as
3830 type instance.
3832 =back
3834 =head3 The WAFL block
3836 This will collect various performance data about the WAFL file system. At the
3837 moment this just means cache performance.
3839 B<Note:> To get this data the collectd user needs the
3840 "api-perf-object-get-instances" capability.
3842 B<Note:> The interface to get these values is classified as "Diagnostics" by
3843 NetApp. This means that it is not guaranteed to be stable even between minor
3844 releases.
3846 =over 4
3848 =item B<Interval> I<Seconds>
3850 Collect disk statistics every I<Seconds> seconds.
3852 =item B<GetNameCache> B<true>|B<false>
3854 Optional
3856 Type: boolean
3858 Default: true
3860 Result: One value list of type "cache_ratio" and type instance
3861 "name_cache_hit".
3863 =item B<GetDirCache> B<true>|B<false>
3865 Optional
3867 Type: boolean
3869 Default: true
3871 Result: One value list of type "cache_ratio" and type instance "find_dir_hit".
3873 =item B<GetInodeCache> B<true>|B<false>
3875 Optional
3877 Type: boolean
3879 Default: true
3881 Result: One value list of type "cache_ratio" and type instance
3882 "inode_cache_hit".
3884 =item B<GetBufferCache> B<true>|B<false>
3886 B<Note:> This is the same value that the NetApp CLI command "sysstat" returns
3887 in the "Cache hit" field.
3889 Optional
3891 Type: boolean
3893 Default: true
3895 Result: One value list of type "cache_ratio" and type instance "buf_hash_hit".
3897 =back
3899 =head3 The Disks block
3901 This will collect performance data about the individual disks in the NetApp.
3903 B<Note:> To get this data the collectd user needs the
3904 "api-perf-object-get-instances" capability.
3906 =over 4
3908 =item B<Interval> I<Seconds>
3910 Collect disk statistics every I<Seconds> seconds.
3912 =item B<GetBusy> B<true>|B<false>
3914 If you set this option to true the busy time of all disks will be calculated
3915 and the value of the busiest disk in the system will be written.
3917 B<Note:> This is the same values that the NetApp CLI command "sysstat" returns
3918 in the "Disk util" field. Probably.
3920 Optional
3922 Type: boolean
3924 Default: true
3926 Result: One value list of type "percent" and type instance "disk_busy".
3928 =back
3930 =head3 The VolumePerf block
3932 This will collect various performance data about the individual volumes.
3934 You can select which data to collect about which volume using the following
3935 options. They follow the standard ignorelist semantic.
3937 B<Note:> To get this data the collectd user needs the
3938 I<api-perf-object-get-instances> capability.
3940 =over 4
3942 =item B<Interval> I<Seconds>
3944 Collect volume performance data every I<Seconds> seconds.
3946 =item B<GetIO> I<Volume>
3948 =item B<GetOps> I<Volume>
3950 =item B<GetLatency> I<Volume>
3952 Select the given volume for IO, operations or latency statistics collection.
3953 The argument is the name of the volume without the C</vol/> prefix.
3955 Since the standard ignorelist functionality is used here, you can use a string
3956 starting and ending with a slash to specify regular expression matching: To
3957 match the volumes "vol0", "vol2" and "vol7", you can use this regular
3958 expression:
3960 GetIO "/^vol[027]$/"
3962 If no regular expression is specified, an exact match is required. Both,
3963 regular and exact matching are case sensitive.
3965 If no volume was specified at all for either of the three options, that data
3966 will be collected for all available volumes.
3968 =item B<IgnoreSelectedIO> B<true>|B<false>
3970 =item B<IgnoreSelectedOps> B<true>|B<false>
3972 =item B<IgnoreSelectedLatency> B<true>|B<false>
3974 When set to B<true>, the volumes selected for IO, operations or latency
3975 statistics collection will be ignored and the data will be collected for all
3976 other volumes.
3978 When set to B<false>, data will only be collected for the specified volumes and
3979 all other volumes will be ignored.
3981 If no volumes have been specified with the above B<Get*> options, all volumes
3982 will be collected regardless of the B<IgnoreSelected*> option.
3984 Defaults to B<false>
3986 =back
3988 =head3 The VolumeUsage block
3990 This will collect capacity data about the individual volumes.
3992 B<Note:> To get this data the collectd user needs the I<api-volume-list-info>
3993 capability.
3995 =over 4
3997 =item B<Interval> I<Seconds>
3999 Collect volume usage statistics every I<Seconds> seconds.
4001 =item B<GetCapacity> I<VolumeName>
4003 The current capacity of the volume will be collected. This will result in two
4004 to four value lists, depending on the configuration of the volume. All data
4005 sources are of type "df_complex" with the name of the volume as
4006 plugin_instance.
4008 There will be type_instances "used" and "free" for the number of used and
4009 available bytes on the volume. If the volume has some space reserved for
4010 snapshots, a type_instance "snap_reserved" will be available. If the volume
4011 has SIS enabled, a type_instance "sis_saved" will be available. This is the
4012 number of bytes saved by the SIS feature.
4014 B<Note:> The current NetApp API has a bug that results in this value being
4015 reported as a 32E<nbsp>bit number. This plugin tries to guess the correct
4016 number which works most of the time. If you see strange values here, bug
4017 NetApp support to fix this.
4019 Repeat this option to specify multiple volumes.
4021 =item B<IgnoreSelectedCapacity> B<true>|B<false>
4023 Specify whether to collect only the volumes selected by the B<GetCapacity>
4024 option or to ignore those volumes. B<IgnoreSelectedCapacity> defaults to
4025 B<false>. However, if no B<GetCapacity> option is specified at all, all
4026 capacities will be selected anyway.
4028 =item B<GetSnapshot> I<VolumeName>
4030 Select volumes from which to collect snapshot information.
4032 Usually, the space used for snapshots is included in the space reported as
4033 "used". If snapshot information is collected as well, the space used for
4034 snapshots is subtracted from the used space.
4036 To make things even more interesting, it is possible to reserve space to be
4037 used for snapshots. If the space required for snapshots is less than that
4038 reserved space, there is "reserved free" and "reserved used" space in addition
4039 to "free" and "used". If the space required for snapshots exceeds the reserved
4040 space, that part allocated in the normal space is subtracted from the "used"
4041 space again.
4043 Repeat this option to specify multiple volumes.
4045 =item B<IgnoreSelectedSnapshot>
4047 Specify whether to collect only the volumes selected by the B<GetSnapshot>
4048 option or to ignore those volumes. B<IgnoreSelectedSnapshot> defaults to
4049 B<false>. However, if no B<GetSnapshot> option is specified at all, all
4050 capacities will be selected anyway.
4052 =back
4054 =head3 The Quota block
4056 This will collect (tree) quota statistics (used disk space and number of used
4057 files). This mechanism is useful to get usage information for single qtrees.
4058 In case the quotas are not used for any other purpose, an entry similar to the
4059 following in C</etc/quotas> would be sufficient:
4061 /vol/volA/some_qtree tree - - - - -
4063 After adding the entry, issue C<quota on -w volA> on the NetApp filer.
4065 =over 4
4067 =item B<Interval> I<Seconds>
4069 Collect SnapVault(R) statistics every I<Seconds> seconds.
4071 =back
4073 =head3 The SnapVault block
4075 This will collect statistics about the time and traffic of SnapVault(R)
4076 transfers.
4078 =over 4
4080 =item B<Interval> I<Seconds>
4082 Collect SnapVault(R) statistics every I<Seconds> seconds.
4084 =back
4086 =head2 Plugin C<netlink>
4088 The C<netlink> plugin uses a netlink socket to query the Linux kernel about
4089 statistics of various interface and routing aspects.
4091 =over 4
4093 =item B<Interface> I<Interface>
4095 =item B<VerboseInterface> I<Interface>
4097 Instruct the plugin to collect interface statistics. This is basically the same
4098 as the statistics provided by the C<interface> plugin (see above) but
4099 potentially much more detailed.
4101 When configuring with B<Interface> only the basic statistics will be collected,
4102 namely octets, packets, and errors. These statistics are collected by
4103 the C<interface> plugin, too, so using both at the same time is no benefit.
4105 When configured with B<VerboseInterface> all counters B<except> the basic ones,
4106 so that no data needs to be collected twice if you use the C<interface> plugin.
4107 This includes dropped packets, received multicast packets, collisions and a
4108 whole zoo of differentiated RX and TX errors. You can try the following command
4109 to get an idea of what awaits you:
4111 ip -s -s link list
4113 If I<Interface> is B<All>, all interfaces will be selected.
4115 =item B<QDisc> I<Interface> [I<QDisc>]
4117 =item B<Class> I<Interface> [I<Class>]
4119 =item B<Filter> I<Interface> [I<Filter>]
4121 Collect the octets and packets that pass a certain qdisc, class or filter.
4123 QDiscs and classes are identified by their type and handle (or classid).
4124 Filters don't necessarily have a handle, therefore the parent's handle is used.
4125 The notation used in collectd differs from that used in tc(1) in that it
4126 doesn't skip the major or minor number if it's zero and doesn't print special
4127 ids by their name. So, for example, a qdisc may be identified by
4128 C<pfifo_fast-1:0> even though the minor number of B<all> qdiscs is zero and
4129 thus not displayed by tc(1).
4131 If B<QDisc>, B<Class>, or B<Filter> is given without the second argument,
4132 i.E<nbsp>.e. without an identifier, all qdiscs, classes, or filters that are
4133 associated with that interface will be collected.
4135 Since a filter itself doesn't necessarily have a handle, the parent's handle is
4136 used. This may lead to problems when more than one filter is attached to a
4137 qdisc or class. This isn't nice, but we don't know how this could be done any
4138 better. If you have a idea, please don't hesitate to tell us.
4140 As with the B<Interface> option you can specify B<All> as the interface,
4141 meaning all interfaces.
4143 Here are some examples to help you understand the above text more easily:
4145 <Plugin netlink>
4146 VerboseInterface "All"
4147 QDisc "eth0" "pfifo_fast-1:0"
4148 QDisc "ppp0"
4149 Class "ppp0" "htb-1:10"
4150 Filter "ppp0" "u32-1:0"
4151 </Plugin>
4153 =item B<IgnoreSelected>
4155 The behavior is the same as with all other similar plugins: If nothing is
4156 selected at all, everything is collected. If some things are selected using the
4157 options described above, only these statistics are collected. If you set
4158 B<IgnoreSelected> to B<true>, this behavior is inverted, i.E<nbsp>e. the
4159 specified statistics will not be collected.
4161 =back
4163 =head2 Plugin C<network>
4165 The Network plugin sends data to a remote instance of collectd, receives data
4166 from a remote instance, or both at the same time. Data which has been received
4167 from the network is usually not transmitted again, but this can be activated, see
4168 the B<Forward> option below.
4170 The default IPv6 multicast group is C<ff18::efc0:4a42>. The default IPv4
4171 multicast group is C<239.192.74.66>. The default I<UDP> port is B<25826>.
4173 Both, B<Server> and B<Listen> can be used as single option or as block. When
4174 used as block, given options are valid for this socket only. The following
4175 example will export the metrics twice: Once to an "internal" server (without
4176 encryption and signing) and one to an external server (with cryptographic
4177 signature):
4179 <Plugin "network">
4180 # Export to an internal server
4181 # (demonstrates usage without additional options)
4182 Server "collectd.internal.tld"
4184 # Export to an external server
4185 # (demonstrates usage with signature options)
4186 <Server "collectd.external.tld">
4187 SecurityLevel "sign"
4188 Username "myhostname"
4189 Password "ohl0eQue"
4190 </Server>
4191 </Plugin>
4193 =over 4
4195 =item B<E<lt>Server> I<Host> [I<Port>]B<E<gt>>
4197 The B<Server> statement/block sets the server to send datagrams to. The
4198 statement may occur multiple times to send each datagram to multiple
4199 destinations.
4201 The argument I<Host> may be a hostname, an IPv4 address or an IPv6 address. The
4202 optional second argument specifies a port number or a service name. If not
4203 given, the default, B<25826>, is used.
4205 The following options are recognized within B<Server> blocks:
4207 =over 4
4209 =item B<SecurityLevel> B<Encrypt>|B<Sign>|B<None>
4211 Set the security you require for network communication. When the security level
4212 has been set to B<Encrypt>, data sent over the network will be encrypted using
4213 I<AES-256>. The integrity of encrypted packets is ensured using I<SHA-1>. When
4214 set to B<Sign>, transmitted data is signed using the I<HMAC-SHA-256> message
4215 authentication code. When set to B<None>, data is sent without any security.
4217 This feature is only available if the I<network> plugin was linked with
4218 I<libgcrypt>.
4220 =item B<Username> I<Username>
4222 Sets the username to transmit. This is used by the server to lookup the
4223 password. See B<AuthFile> below. All security levels except B<None> require
4224 this setting.
4226 This feature is only available if the I<network> plugin was linked with
4227 I<libgcrypt>.
4229 =item B<Password> I<Password>
4231 Sets a password (shared secret) for this socket. All security levels except
4232 B<None> require this setting.
4234 This feature is only available if the I<network> plugin was linked with
4235 I<libgcrypt>.
4237 =item B<Interface> I<Interface name>
4239 Set the outgoing interface for IP packets. This applies at least
4240 to IPv6 packets and if possible to IPv4. If this option is not applicable,
4241 undefined or a non-existent interface name is specified, the default
4242 behavior is to let the kernel choose the appropriate interface. Be warned
4243 that the manual selection of an interface for unicast traffic is only
4244 necessary in rare cases.
4246 =item B<ResolveInterval> I<Seconds>
4248 Sets the interval at which to re-resolve the DNS for the I<Host>. This is
4249 useful to force a regular DNS lookup to support a high availability setup. If
4250 not specified, re-resolves are never attempted.
4252 =back
4254 =item B<E<lt>Listen> I<Host> [I<Port>]B<E<gt>>
4256 The B<Listen> statement sets the interfaces to bind to. When multiple
4257 statements are found the daemon will bind to multiple interfaces.
4259 The argument I<Host> may be a hostname, an IPv4 address or an IPv6 address. If
4260 the argument is a multicast address the daemon will join that multicast group.
4261 The optional second argument specifies a port number or a service name. If not
4262 given, the default, B<25826>, is used.
4264 The following options are recognized within C<E<lt>ListenE<gt>> blocks:
4266 =over 4
4268 =item B<SecurityLevel> B<Encrypt>|B<Sign>|B<None>
4270 Set the security you require for network communication. When the security level
4271 has been set to B<Encrypt>, only encrypted data will be accepted. The integrity
4272 of encrypted packets is ensured using I<SHA-1>. When set to B<Sign>, only
4273 signed and encrypted data is accepted. When set to B<None>, all data will be
4274 accepted. If an B<AuthFile> option was given (see below), encrypted data is
4275 decrypted if possible.
4277 This feature is only available if the I<network> plugin was linked with
4278 I<libgcrypt>.
4280 =item B<AuthFile> I<Filename>
4282 Sets a file in which usernames are mapped to passwords. These passwords are
4283 used to verify signatures and to decrypt encrypted network packets. If
4284 B<SecurityLevel> is set to B<None>, this is optional. If given, signed data is
4285 verified and encrypted packets are decrypted. Otherwise, signed data is
4286 accepted without checking the signature and encrypted data cannot be decrypted.
4287 For the other security levels this option is mandatory.
4289 The file format is very simple: Each line consists of a username followed by a
4290 colon and any number of spaces followed by the password. To demonstrate, an
4291 example file could look like this:
4293 user0: foo
4294 user1: bar
4296 Each time a packet is received, the modification time of the file is checked
4297 using L<stat(2)>. If the file has been changed, the contents is re-read. While
4298 the file is being read, it is locked using L<fcntl(2)>.
4300 =item B<Interface> I<Interface name>
4302 Set the incoming interface for IP packets explicitly. This applies at least
4303 to IPv6 packets and if possible to IPv4. If this option is not applicable,
4304 undefined or a non-existent interface name is specified, the default
4305 behavior is, to let the kernel choose the appropriate interface. Thus incoming
4306 traffic gets only accepted, if it arrives on the given interface.
4308 =back
4310 =item B<TimeToLive> I<1-255>
4312 Set the time-to-live of sent packets. This applies to all, unicast and
4313 multicast, and IPv4 and IPv6 packets. The default is to not change this value.
4314 That means that multicast packets will be sent with a TTL of C<1> (one) on most
4315 operating systems.
4317 =item B<MaxPacketSize> I<1024-65535>
4319 Set the maximum size for datagrams received over the network. Packets larger
4320 than this will be truncated. Defaults to 1452E<nbsp>bytes, which is the maximum
4321 payload size that can be transmitted in one Ethernet frame using IPv6E<nbsp>/
4322 UDP.
4324 On the server side, this limit should be set to the largest value used on
4325 I<any> client. Likewise, the value on the client must not be larger than the
4326 value on the server, or data will be lost.
4328 B<Compatibility:> Versions prior to I<versionE<nbsp>4.8> used a fixed sized
4329 buffer of 1024E<nbsp>bytes. Versions I<4.8>, I<4.9> and I<4.10> used a default
4330 value of 1024E<nbsp>bytes to avoid problems when sending data to an older
4331 server.
4333 =item B<Forward> I<true|false>
4335 If set to I<true>, write packets that were received via the network plugin to
4336 the sending sockets. This should only be activated when the B<Listen>- and
4337 B<Server>-statements differ. Otherwise packets may be send multiple times to
4338 the same multicast group. While this results in more network traffic than
4339 necessary it's not a huge problem since the plugin has a duplicate detection,
4340 so the values will not loop.
4342 =item B<ReportStats> B<true>|B<false>
4344 The network plugin cannot only receive and send statistics, it can also create
4345 statistics about itself. Collected data included the number of received and
4346 sent octets and packets, the length of the receive queue and the number of
4347 values handled. When set to B<true>, the I<Network plugin> will make these
4348 statistics available. Defaults to B<false>.
4350 =back
4352 =head2 Plugin C<nginx>
4354 This plugin collects the number of connections and requests handled by the
4355 C<nginx daemon> (speak: engineE<nbsp>X), a HTTP and mail server/proxy. It
4356 queries the page provided by the C<ngx_http_stub_status_module> module, which
4357 isn't compiled by default. Please refer to
4358 L<http://wiki.codemongers.com/NginxStubStatusModule> for more information on
4359 how to compile and configure nginx and this module.
4361 The following options are accepted by the C<nginx plugin>:
4363 =over 4
4365 =item B<URL> I<http://host/nginx_status>
4367 Sets the URL of the C<ngx_http_stub_status_module> output.
4369 =item B<User> I<Username>
4371 Optional user name needed for authentication.
4373 =item B<Password> I<Password>
4375 Optional password needed for authentication.
4377 =item B<VerifyPeer> B<true|false>
4379 Enable or disable peer SSL certificate verification. See
4380 L<http://curl.haxx.se/docs/sslcerts.html> for details. Enabled by default.
4382 =item B<VerifyHost> B<true|false>
4384 Enable or disable peer host name verification. If enabled, the plugin checks
4385 if the C<Common Name> or a C<Subject Alternate Name> field of the SSL
4386 certificate matches the host name provided by the B<URL> option. If this
4387 identity check fails, the connection is aborted. Obviously, only works when
4388 connecting to a SSL enabled server. Enabled by default.
4390 =item B<CACert> I<File>
4392 File that holds one or more SSL certificates. If you want to use HTTPS you will
4393 possibly need this option. What CA certificates come bundled with C<libcurl>
4394 and are checked by default depends on the distribution you use.
4396 =item B<Timeout> I<Milliseconds>
4398 The B<Timeout> option sets the overall timeout for HTTP requests to B<URL>, in
4399 milliseconds. By default, the configured B<Interval> is used to set the
4400 timeout.
4402 =back
4404 =head2 Plugin C<notify_desktop>
4406 This plugin sends a desktop notification to a notification daemon, as defined
4407 in the Desktop Notification Specification. To actually display the
4408 notifications, B<notification-daemon> is required and B<collectd> has to be
4409 able to access the X server (i.E<nbsp>e., the C<DISPLAY> and C<XAUTHORITY>
4410 environment variables have to be set correctly) and the D-Bus message bus.
4412 The Desktop Notification Specification can be found at
4413 L<http://www.galago-project.org/specs/notification/>.
4415 =over 4
4417 =item B<OkayTimeout> I<timeout>
4419 =item B<WarningTimeout> I<timeout>
4421 =item B<FailureTimeout> I<timeout>
4423 Set the I<timeout>, in milliseconds, after which to expire the notification
4424 for C<OKAY>, C<WARNING> and C<FAILURE> severities respectively. If zero has
4425 been specified, the displayed notification will not be closed at all - the
4426 user has to do so herself. These options default to 5000. If a negative number
4427 has been specified, the default is used as well.
4429 =back
4431 =head2 Plugin C<notify_email>
4433 The I<notify_email> plugin uses the I<ESMTP> library to send notifications to a
4434 configured email address.
4436 I<libESMTP> is available from L<http://www.stafford.uklinux.net/libesmtp/>.
4438 Available configuration options:
4440 =over 4
4442 =item B<From> I<Address>
4444 Email address from which the emails should appear to come from.
4446 Default: C<root@localhost>
4448 =item B<Recipient> I<Address>
4450 Configures the email address(es) to which the notifications should be mailed.
4451 May be repeated to send notifications to multiple addresses.
4453 At least one B<Recipient> must be present for the plugin to work correctly.
4455 =item B<SMTPServer> I<Hostname>
4457 Hostname of the SMTP server to connect to.
4459 Default: C<localhost>
4461 =item B<SMTPPort> I<Port>
4463 TCP port to connect to.
4465 Default: C<25>
4467 =item B<SMTPUser> I<Username>
4469 Username for ASMTP authentication. Optional.
4471 =item B<SMTPPassword> I<Password>
4473 Password for ASMTP authentication. Optional.
4475 =item B<Subject> I<Subject>
4477 Subject-template to use when sending emails. There must be exactly two
4478 string-placeholders in the subject, given in the standard I<printf(3)> syntax,
4479 i.E<nbsp>e. C<%s>. The first will be replaced with the severity, the second
4480 with the hostname.
4482 Default: C<Collectd notify: %s@%s>
4484 =back
4486 =head2 Plugin C<notify_nagios>
4488 The I<notify_nagios> plugin writes notifications to Nagios' I<command file> as
4489 a I<passive service check result>.
4491 Available configuration options:
4493 =over 4
4495 =item B<CommandFile> I<Path>
4497 Sets the I<command file> to write to. Defaults to F</usr/local/nagios/var/rw/nagios.cmd>.
4499 =back
4501 =head2 Plugin C<ntpd>
4503 The C<ntpd> plugin collects per-peer ntpd data such as time offset and time
4504 dispersion.
4506 For talking to B<ntpd>, it mimics what the B<ntpdc> control program does on
4507 wire - using B<mode 7> specific requests. This mode is deprecated with
4508 newer B<ntpd> releases (4.2.7p230 and later). For the C<ntpd> plugin to work
4509 correctly with them, the ntp daemon must be explicitly configured to
4510 enable B<mode 7> (which is disabled by default). Refer to the I<ntp.conf(5)>
4511 manual page for details.
4513 Available configuration options for the C<ntpd> plugin:
4515 =over 4
4517 =item B<Host> I<Hostname>
4519 Hostname of the host running B<ntpd>. Defaults to B<localhost>.
4521 =item B<Port> I<Port>
4523 UDP-Port to connect to. Defaults to B<123>.
4525 =item B<ReverseLookups> B<true>|B<false>
4527 Sets whether or not to perform reverse lookups on peers. Since the name or
4528 IP-address may be used in a filename it is recommended to disable reverse
4529 lookups. The default is to do reverse lookups to preserve backwards
4530 compatibility, though.
4532 =item B<IncludeUnitID> B<true>|B<false>
4534 When a peer is a refclock, include the unit ID in the I<type instance>.
4535 Defaults to B<false> for backward compatibility.
4537 If two refclock peers use the same driver and this is B<false>, the plugin will
4538 try to write simultaneous measurements from both to the same type instance.
4539 This will result in error messages in the log and only one set of measurements
4540 making it through.
4542 =back
4544 =head2 Plugin C<nut>
4546 =over 4
4548 =item B<UPS> I<upsname>B<@>I<hostname>[B<:>I<port>]
4550 Add a UPS to collect data from. The format is identical to the one accepted by
4551 L<upsc(8)>.
4553 =back
4555 =head2 Plugin C<olsrd>
4557 The I<olsrd> plugin connects to the TCP port opened by the I<txtinfo> plugin of
4558 the Optimized Link State Routing daemon and reads information about the current
4559 state of the meshed network.
4561 The following configuration options are understood:
4563 =over 4
4565 =item B<Host> I<Host>
4567 Connect to I<Host>. Defaults to B<"localhost">.
4569 =item B<Port> I<Port>
4571 Specifies the port to connect to. This must be a string, even if you give the
4572 port as a number rather than a service name. Defaults to B<"2006">.
4574 =item B<CollectLinks> B<No>|B<Summary>|B<Detail>
4576 Specifies what information to collect about links, i.E<nbsp>e. direct
4577 connections of the daemon queried. If set to B<No>, no information is
4578 collected. If set to B<Summary>, the number of links and the average of all
4579 I<link quality> (LQ) and I<neighbor link quality> (NLQ) values is calculated.
4580 If set to B<Detail> LQ and NLQ are collected per link.
4582 Defaults to B<Detail>.
4584 =item B<CollectRoutes> B<No>|B<Summary>|B<Detail>
4586 Specifies what information to collect about routes of the daemon queried. If
4587 set to B<No>, no information is collected. If set to B<Summary>, the number of
4588 routes and the average I<metric> and I<ETX> is calculated. If set to B<Detail>
4589 metric and ETX are collected per route.
4591 Defaults to B<Summary>.
4593 =item B<CollectTopology> B<No>|B<Summary>|B<Detail>
4595 Specifies what information to collect about the global topology. If set to
4596 B<No>, no information is collected. If set to B<Summary>, the number of links
4597 in the entire topology and the average I<link quality> (LQ) is calculated.
4598 If set to B<Detail> LQ and NLQ are collected for each link in the entire topology.
4600 Defaults to B<Summary>.
4602 =back
4604 =head2 Plugin C<onewire>
4606 B<EXPERIMENTAL!> See notes below.
4608 The C<onewire> plugin uses the B<owcapi> library from the B<owfs> project
4609 L<http://owfs.org/> to read sensors connected via the onewire bus.
4611 It can be used in two possible modes - standard or advanced.
4613 In the standard mode only temperature sensors (sensors with the family code
4614 C<10>, C<22> and C<28> - e.g. DS1820, DS18S20, DS1920) can be read. If you have
4615 other sensors you would like to have included, please send a sort request to
4616 the mailing list. You can select sensors to be read or to be ignored depending
4617 on the option B<IgnoreSelected>). When no list is provided the whole bus is
4618 walked and all sensors are read.
4620 Hubs (the DS2409 chips) are working, but read the note, why this plugin is
4621 experimental, below.
4623 In the advanced mode you can configure any sensor to be read (only numerical
4624 value) using full OWFS path (e.g. "/uncached/10.F10FCA000800/temperature").
4625 In this mode you have to list all the sensors. Neither default bus walk nor
4626 B<IgnoreSelected> are used here. Address and type (file) is extracted from
4627 the path automatically and should produce compatible structure with the "standard"
4628 mode (basically the path is expected as for example
4629 "/uncached/10.F10FCA000800/temperature" where it would extract address part
4630 "F10FCA000800" and the rest after the slash is considered the type - here
4631 "temperature").
4632 There are two advantages to this mode - you can access virtually any sensor
4633 (not just temperature), select whether to use cached or directly read values
4634 and it is slighlty faster. The downside is more complex configuration.
4636 The two modes are distinguished automatically by the format of the address.
4637 It is not possible to mix the two modes. Once a full path is detected in any
4638 B<Sensor> then the whole addressing (all sensors) is considered to be this way
4639 (and as standard addresses will fail parsing they will be ignored).
4641 =over 4
4643 =item B<Device> I<Device>
4645 Sets the device to read the values from. This can either be a "real" hardware
4646 device, such as a serial port or an USB port, or the address of the
4647 L<owserver(1)> socket, usually B<localhost:4304>.
4649 Though the documentation claims to automatically recognize the given address
4650 format, with versionE<nbsp>2.7p4 we had to specify the type explicitly. So
4651 with that version, the following configuration worked for us:
4653 <Plugin onewire>
4654 Device "-s localhost:4304"
4655 </Plugin>
4657 This directive is B<required> and does not have a default value.
4659 =item B<Sensor> I<Sensor>
4661 In the standard mode selects sensors to collect or to ignore
4662 (depending on B<IgnoreSelected>, see below). Sensors are specified without
4663 the family byte at the beginning, so you have to use for example C<F10FCA000800>,
4664 and B<not> include the leading C<10.> family byte and point.
4665 When no B<Sensor> is configured the whole Onewire bus is walked and all supported
4666 sensors (see above) are read.
4668 In the advanced mode the B<Sensor> specifies full OWFS path - e.g.
4669 C</uncached/10.F10FCA000800/temperature> (or when cached values are OK
4670 C</10.F10FCA000800/temperature>). B<IgnoreSelected> is not used.
4672 As there can be multiple devices on the bus you can list multiple sensor (use
4673 multiple B<Sensor> elements).
4675 =item B<IgnoreSelected> I<true>|I<false>
4677 If no configuration is given, the B<onewire> plugin will collect data from all
4678 sensors found. This may not be practical, especially if sensors are added and
4679 removed regularly. Sometimes, however, it's easier/preferred to collect only
4680 specific sensors or all sensors I<except> a few specified ones. This option
4681 enables you to do that: By setting B<IgnoreSelected> to I<true> the effect of
4682 B<Sensor> is inverted: All selected interfaces are ignored and all other
4683 interfaces are collected.
4685 Used only in the standard mode - see above.
4687 =item B<Interval> I<Seconds>
4689 Sets the interval in which all sensors should be read. If not specified, the
4690 global B<Interval> setting is used.
4692 =back
4694 B<EXPERIMENTAL!> The C<onewire> plugin is experimental, because it doesn't yet
4695 work with big setups. It works with one sensor being attached to one
4696 controller, but as soon as you throw in a couple more senors and maybe a hub
4697 or two, reading all values will take more than ten seconds (the default
4698 interval). We will probably add some separate thread for reading the sensors
4699 and some cache or something like that, but it's not done yet. We will try to
4700 maintain backwards compatibility in the future, but we can't promise. So in
4701 short: If it works for you: Great! But keep in mind that the config I<might>
4702 change, though this is unlikely. Oh, and if you want to help improving this
4703 plugin, just send a short notice to the mailing list. ThanksE<nbsp>:)
4705 =head2 Plugin C<openldap>
4707 To use the C<openldap> plugin you first need to configure the I<OpenLDAP>
4708 server correctly. The backend database C<monitor> needs to be loaded and
4709 working. See slapd-monitor(5) for the details.
4711 The configuration of the C<openldap> plugin consists of one or more B<Instance>
4712 blocks. Each block requires one string argument as the instance name. For
4713 example:
4715 <Plugin "openldap">
4716 <Instance "foo">
4717 URL "ldap://localhost/"
4718 </Instance>
4719 <Instance "bar">
4720 URL "ldaps://localhost/"
4721 </Instance>
4722 </Plugin>
4724 The instance name will be used as the I<plugin instance>. To emulate the old
4725 (versionE<nbsp>4) behavior, you can use an empty string (""). In order for the
4726 plugin to work correctly, each instance name must be unique. This is not
4727 enforced by the plugin and it is your responsibility to ensure it is.
4729 The following options are accepted within each B<Instance> block:
4731 =over 4
4733 =item B<URL> I<ldap://host/binddn>
4735 Sets the URL to use to connect to the I<OpenLDAP> server. This option is
4736 I<mandatory>.
4738 =item B<BindDN> I<BindDN>
4740 Name in the form of an LDAP distinguished name intended to be used for
4741 authentication. Defaults to empty string to establish an anonymous authorization.
4743 =item B<Password> I<Password>
4745 Password for simple bind authentication. If this option is not set,
4746 unauthenticated bind operation is used.
4748 =item B<StartTLS> B<true|false>
4750 Defines whether TLS must be used when connecting to the I<OpenLDAP> server.
4751 Disabled by default.
4753 =item B<VerifyHost> B<true|false>
4755 Enables or disables peer host name verification. If enabled, the plugin checks
4756 if the C<Common Name> or a C<Subject Alternate Name> field of the SSL
4757 certificate matches the host name provided by the B<URL> option. If this
4758 identity check fails, the connection is aborted. Enabled by default.
4760 =item B<CACert> I<File>
4762 File that holds one or more SSL certificates. If you want to use TLS/SSL you
4763 may possibly need this option. What CA certificates are checked by default
4764 depends on the distribution you use and can be changed with the usual ldap
4765 client configuration mechanisms. See ldap.conf(5) for the details.
4767 =item B<Timeout> I<Seconds>
4769 Sets the timeout value for ldap operations. Defaults to B<-1> which results in
4770 an infinite timeout.
4772 =item B<Version> I<Version>
4774 An integer which sets the LDAP protocol version number to use when connecting
4775 to the I<OpenLDAP> server. Defaults to B<3> for using I<LDAPv3>.
4777 =back
4779 =head2 Plugin C<openvpn>
4781 The OpenVPN plugin reads a status file maintained by OpenVPN and gathers
4782 traffic statistics about connected clients.
4784 To set up OpenVPN to write to the status file periodically, use the
4785 B<--status> option of OpenVPN. Since OpenVPN can write two different formats,
4786 you need to set the required format, too. This is done by setting
4787 B<--status-version> to B<2>.
4789 So, in a nutshell you need:
4791 openvpn $OTHER_OPTIONS \
4792 --status "/var/run/openvpn-status" 10 \
4793 --status-version 2
4795 Available options:
4797 =over 4
4799 =item B<StatusFile> I<File>
4801 Specifies the location of the status file.
4803 =item B<ImprovedNamingSchema> B<true>|B<false>
4805 When enabled, the filename of the status file will be used as plugin instance
4806 and the client's "common name" will be used as type instance. This is required
4807 when reading multiple status files. Enabling this option is recommended, but to
4808 maintain backwards compatibility this option is disabled by default.
4810 =item B<CollectCompression> B<true>|B<false>
4812 Sets whether or not statistics about the compression used by OpenVPN should be
4813 collected. This information is only available in I<single> mode. Enabled by
4814 default.
4816 =item B<CollectIndividualUsers> B<true>|B<false>
4818 Sets whether or not traffic information is collected for each connected client
4819 individually. If set to false, currently no traffic data is collected at all
4820 because aggregating this data in a save manner is tricky. Defaults to B<true>.
4822 =item B<CollectUserCount> B<true>|B<false>
4824 When enabled, the number of currently connected clients or users is collected.
4825 This is especially interesting when B<CollectIndividualUsers> is disabled, but
4826 can be configured independently from that option. Defaults to B<false>.
4828 =back
4830 =head2 Plugin C<oracle>
4832 The "oracle" plugin uses the Oracle® Call Interface I<(OCI)> to connect to an
4833 Oracle® Database and lets you execute SQL statements there. It is very similar
4834 to the "dbi" plugin, because it was written around the same time. See the "dbi"
4835 plugin's documentation above for details.
4837 <Plugin oracle>
4838 <Query "out_of_stock">
4839 Statement "SELECT category, COUNT(*) AS value FROM products WHERE in_stock = 0 GROUP BY category"
4840 <Result>
4841 Type "gauge"
4842 # InstancePrefix "foo"
4843 InstancesFrom "category"
4844 ValuesFrom "value"
4845 </Result>
4846 </Query>
4847 <Database "product_information">
4848 ConnectID "db01"
4849 Username "oracle"
4850 Password "secret"
4851 Query "out_of_stock"
4852 </Database>
4853 </Plugin>
4855 =head3 B<Query> blocks
4857 The Query blocks are handled identically to the Query blocks of the "dbi"
4858 plugin. Please see its documentation above for details on how to specify
4859 queries.
4861 =head3 B<Database> blocks
4863 Database blocks define a connection to a database and which queries should be
4864 sent to that database. Each database needs a "name" as string argument in the
4865 starting tag of the block. This name will be used as "PluginInstance" in the
4866 values submitted to the daemon. Other than that, that name is not used.
4868 =over 4
4870 =item B<ConnectID> I<ID>
4872 Defines the "database alias" or "service name" to connect to. Usually, these
4873 names are defined in the file named C<$ORACLE_HOME/network/admin/tnsnames.ora>.
4875 =item B<Host> I<Host>
4877 Hostname to use when dispatching values for this database. Defaults to using
4878 the global hostname of the I<collectd> instance.
4880 =item B<Username> I<Username>
4882 Username used for authentication.
4884 =item B<Password> I<Password>
4886 Password used for authentication.
4888 =item B<Query> I<QueryName>
4890 Associates the query named I<QueryName> with this database connection. The
4891 query needs to be defined I<before> this statement, i.E<nbsp>e. all query
4892 blocks you want to refer to must be placed above the database block you want to
4893 refer to them from.
4895 =back
4897 =head2 Plugin C<perl>
4899 This plugin embeds a Perl-interpreter into collectd and provides an interface
4900 to collectd's plugin system. See L<collectd-perl(5)> for its documentation.
4902 =head2 Plugin C<pinba>
4904 The I<Pinba plugin> receives profiling information from I<Pinba>, an extension
4905 for the I<PHP> interpreter. At the end of executing a script, i.e. after a
4906 PHP-based webpage has been delivered, the extension will send a UDP packet
4907 containing timing information, peak memory usage and so on. The plugin will
4908 wait for such packets, parse them and account the provided information, which
4909 is then dispatched to the daemon once per interval.
4911 Synopsis:
4913 <Plugin pinba>
4914 Address "::0"
4915 Port "30002"
4916 # Overall statistics for the website.
4917 <View "www-total">
4918 Server "www.example.com"
4919 </View>
4920 # Statistics for www-a only
4921 <View "www-a">
4922 Host "www-a.example.com"
4923 Server "www.example.com"
4924 </View>
4925 # Statistics for www-b only
4926 <View "www-b">
4927 Host "www-b.example.com"
4928 Server "www.example.com"
4929 </View>
4930 </Plugin>
4932 The plugin provides the following configuration options:
4934 =over 4
4936 =item B<Address> I<Node>
4938 Configures the address used to open a listening socket. By default, plugin will
4939 bind to the I<any> address C<::0>.
4941 =item B<Port> I<Service>
4943 Configures the port (service) to bind to. By default the default Pinba port
4944 "30002" will be used. The option accepts service names in addition to port
4945 numbers and thus requires a I<string> argument.
4947 =item E<lt>B<View> I<Name>E<gt> block
4949 The packets sent by the Pinba extension include the hostname of the server, the
4950 server name (the name of the virtual host) and the script that was executed.
4951 Using B<View> blocks it is possible to separate the data into multiple groups
4952 to get more meaningful statistics. Each packet is added to all matching groups,
4953 so that a packet may be accounted for more than once.
4955 =over 4
4957 =item B<Host> I<Host>
4959 Matches the hostname of the system the webserver / script is running on. This
4960 will contain the result of the L<gethostname(2)> system call. If not
4961 configured, all hostnames will be accepted.
4963 =item B<Server> I<Server>
4965 Matches the name of the I<virtual host>, i.e. the contents of the
4966 C<$_SERVER["SERVER_NAME"]> variable when within PHP. If not configured, all
4967 server names will be accepted.
4969 =item B<Script> I<Script>
4971 Matches the name of the I<script name>, i.e. the contents of the
4972 C<$_SERVER["SCRIPT_NAME"]> variable when within PHP. If not configured, all
4973 script names will be accepted.
4975 =back
4977 =back
4979 =head2 Plugin C<ping>
4981 The I<Ping> plugin starts a new thread which sends ICMP "ping" packets to the
4982 configured hosts periodically and measures the network latency. Whenever the
4983 C<read> function of the plugin is called, it submits the average latency, the
4984 standard deviation and the drop rate for each host.
4986 Available configuration options:
4988 =over 4
4990 =item B<Host> I<IP-address>
4992 Host to ping periodically. This option may be repeated several times to ping
4993 multiple hosts.
4995 =item B<Interval> I<Seconds>
4997 Sets the interval in which to send ICMP echo packets to the configured hosts.
4998 This is B<not> the interval in which statistics are queries from the plugin but
4999 the interval in which the hosts are "pinged". Therefore, the setting here
5000 should be smaller than or equal to the global B<Interval> setting. Fractional
5001 times, such as "1.24" are allowed.
5003 Default: B<1.0>
5005 =item B<Timeout> I<Seconds>
5007 Time to wait for a response from the host to which an ICMP packet had been
5008 sent. If a reply was not received after I<Seconds> seconds, the host is assumed
5009 to be down or the packet to be dropped. This setting must be smaller than the
5010 B<Interval> setting above for the plugin to work correctly. Fractional
5011 arguments are accepted.
5013 Default: B<0.9>
5015 =item B<TTL> I<0-255>
5017 Sets the Time-To-Live of generated ICMP packets.
5019 =item B<Size> I<size>
5021 Sets the size of the data payload in ICMP packet to specified I<size> (it
5022 will be filled with regular ASCII pattern). If not set, default 56 byte
5023 long string is used so that the packet size of an ICMPv4 packet is exactly
5024 64 bytes, similar to the behaviour of normal ping(1) command.
5026 =item B<SourceAddress> I<host>
5028 Sets the source address to use. I<host> may either be a numerical network
5029 address or a network hostname.
5031 =item B<Device> I<name>
5033 Sets the outgoing network device to be used. I<name> has to specify an
5034 interface name (e.E<nbsp>g. C<eth0>). This might not be supported by all
5035 operating systems.
5037 =item B<MaxMissed> I<Packets>
5039 Trigger a DNS resolve after the host has not replied to I<Packets> packets. This
5040 enables the use of dynamic DNS services (like dyndns.org) with the ping plugin.
5042 Default: B<-1> (disabled)
5044 =back
5046 =head2 Plugin C<postgresql>
5048 The C<postgresql> plugin queries statistics from PostgreSQL databases. It
5049 keeps a persistent connection to all configured databases and tries to
5050 reconnect if the connection has been interrupted. A database is configured by
5051 specifying a B<Database> block as described below. The default statistics are
5052 collected from PostgreSQL's B<statistics collector> which thus has to be
5053 enabled for this plugin to work correctly. This should usually be the case by
5054 default. See the section "The Statistics Collector" of the B<PostgreSQL
5055 Documentation> for details.
5057 By specifying custom database queries using a B<Query> block as described
5058 below, you may collect any data that is available from some PostgreSQL
5059 database. This way, you are able to access statistics of external daemons
5060 which are available in a PostgreSQL database or use future or special
5061 statistics provided by PostgreSQL without the need to upgrade your collectd
5062 installation.
5064 Starting with version 5.2, the C<postgresql> plugin supports writing data to
5065 PostgreSQL databases as well. This has been implemented in a generic way. You
5066 need to specify an SQL statement which will then be executed by collectd in
5067 order to write the data (see below for details). The benefit of that approach
5068 is that there is no fixed database layout. Rather, the layout may be optimized
5069 for the current setup.
5071 The B<PostgreSQL Documentation> manual can be found at
5072 L<http://www.postgresql.org/docs/manuals/>.
5074 <Plugin postgresql>
5075 <Query magic>
5076 Statement "SELECT magic FROM wizard WHERE host = $1;"
5077 Param hostname
5078 <Result>
5079 Type gauge
5080 InstancePrefix "magic"
5081 ValuesFrom magic
5082 </Result>
5083 </Query>
5085 <Query rt36_tickets>
5086 Statement "SELECT COUNT(type) AS count, type \
5087 FROM (SELECT CASE \
5088 WHEN resolved = 'epoch' THEN 'open' \
5089 ELSE 'resolved' END AS type \
5090 FROM tickets) type \
5091 GROUP BY type;"
5092 <Result>
5093 Type counter
5094 InstancePrefix "rt36_tickets"
5095 InstancesFrom "type"
5096 ValuesFrom "count"
5097 </Result>
5098 </Query>
5100 <Writer sqlstore>
5101 Statement "SELECT collectd_insert($1, $2, $3, $4, $5, $6, $7, $8, $9);"
5102 StoreRates true
5103 </Writer>
5105 <Database foo>
5106 Host "hostname"
5107 Port "5432"
5108 User "username"
5109 Password "secret"
5110 SSLMode "prefer"
5111 KRBSrvName "kerberos_service_name"
5112 Query magic
5113 </Database>
5115 <Database bar>
5116 Interval 300
5117 Service "service_name"
5118 Query backend # predefined
5119 Query rt36_tickets
5120 </Database>
5122 <Database qux>
5123 # ...
5124 Writer sqlstore
5125 CommitInterval 10
5126 </Database>
5127 </Plugin>
5129 The B<Query> block defines one database query which may later be used by a
5130 database definition. It accepts a single mandatory argument which specifies
5131 the name of the query. The names of all queries have to be unique (see the
5132 B<MinVersion> and B<MaxVersion> options below for an exception to this
5133 rule). The following configuration options are available to define the query:
5135 In each B<Query> block, there is one or more B<Result> blocks. B<Result>
5136 blocks define how to handle the values returned from the query. They define
5137 which column holds which value and how to dispatch that value to the daemon.
5138 Multiple B<Result> blocks may be used to extract multiple values from a single
5139 query.
5141 =over 4
5143 =item B<Statement> I<sql query statement>
5145 Specify the I<sql query statement> which the plugin should execute. The string
5146 may contain the tokens B<$1>, B<$2>, etc. which are used to reference the
5147 first, second, etc. parameter. The value of the parameters is specified by the
5148 B<Param> configuration option - see below for details. To include a literal
5149 B<$> character followed by a number, surround it with single quotes (B<'>).
5151 Any SQL command which may return data (such as C<SELECT> or C<SHOW>) is
5152 allowed. Note, however, that only a single command may be used. Semicolons are
5153 allowed as long as a single non-empty command has been specified only.
5155 The returned lines will be handled separately one after another.
5157 =item B<Param> I<hostname>|I<database>|I<username>|I<interval>
5159 Specify the parameters which should be passed to the SQL query. The parameters
5160 are referred to in the SQL query as B<$1>, B<$2>, etc. in the same order as
5161 they appear in the configuration file. The value of the parameter is
5162 determined depending on the value of the B<Param> option as follows:
5164 =over 4
5166 =item I<hostname>
5168 The configured hostname of the database connection. If a UNIX domain socket is
5169 used, the parameter expands to "localhost".
5171 =item I<database>
5173 The name of the database of the current connection.
5175 =item I<instance>
5177 The name of the database plugin instance. See the B<Instance> option of the
5178 database specification below for details.
5180 =item I<username>
5182 The username used to connect to the database.
5184 =item I<interval>
5186 The interval with which this database is queried (as specified by the database
5187 specific or global B<Interval> options).
5189 =back
5191 Please note that parameters are only supported by PostgreSQL's protocol
5192 version 3 and above which was introduced in version 7.4 of PostgreSQL.
5194 =item B<Type> I<type>
5196 The I<type> name to be used when dispatching the values. The type describes
5197 how to handle the data and where to store it. See L<types.db(5)> for more
5198 details on types and their configuration. The number and type of values (as
5199 selected by the B<ValuesFrom> option) has to match the type of the given name.
5201 This option is required inside a B<Result> block.
5203 =item B<InstancePrefix> I<prefix>
5205 =item B<InstancesFrom> I<column0> [I<column1> ...]
5207 Specify how to create the "TypeInstance" for each data set (i.E<nbsp>e. line).
5208 B<InstancePrefix> defines a static prefix that will be prepended to all type
5209 instances. B<InstancesFrom> defines the column names whose values will be used
5210 to create the type instance. Multiple values will be joined together using the
5211 hyphen (C<->) as separation character.
5213 The plugin itself does not check whether or not all built instances are
5214 different. It is your responsibility to assure that each is unique.
5216 Both options are optional. If none is specified, the type instance will be
5217 empty.
5219 =item B<ValuesFrom> I<column0> [I<column1> ...]
5221 Names the columns whose content is used as the actual data for the data sets
5222 that are dispatched to the daemon. How many such columns you need is
5223 determined by the B<Type> setting as explained above. If you specify too many
5224 or not enough columns, the plugin will complain about that and no data will be
5225 submitted to the daemon.
5227 The actual data type, as seen by PostgreSQL, is not that important as long as
5228 it represents numbers. The plugin will automatically cast the values to the
5229 right type if it know how to do that. For that, it uses the L<strtoll(3)> and
5230 L<strtod(3)> functions, so anything supported by those functions is supported
5231 by the plugin as well.
5233 This option is required inside a B<Result> block and may be specified multiple
5234 times. If multiple B<ValuesFrom> options are specified, the columns are read
5235 in the given order.
5237 =item B<MinVersion> I<version>
5239 =item B<MaxVersion> I<version>
5241 Specify the minimum or maximum version of PostgreSQL that this query should be
5242 used with. Some statistics might only be available with certain versions of
5243 PostgreSQL. This allows you to specify multiple queries with the same name but
5244 which apply to different versions, thus allowing you to use the same
5245 configuration in a heterogeneous environment.
5247 The I<version> has to be specified as the concatenation of the major, minor
5248 and patch-level versions, each represented as two-decimal-digit numbers. For
5249 example, version 8.2.3 will become 80203.
5251 =back
5253 The following predefined queries are available (the definitions can be found
5254 in the F<postgresql_default.conf> file which, by default, is available at
5255 C<I<prefix>/share/collectd/>):
5257 =over 4
5259 =item B<backends>
5261 This query collects the number of backends, i.E<nbsp>e. the number of
5262 connected clients.
5264 =item B<transactions>
5266 This query collects the numbers of committed and rolled-back transactions of
5267 the user tables.
5269 =item B<queries>
5271 This query collects the numbers of various table modifications (i.E<nbsp>e.
5272 insertions, updates, deletions) of the user tables.
5274 =item B<query_plans>
5276 This query collects the numbers of various table scans and returned tuples of
5277 the user tables.
5279 =item B<table_states>
5281 This query collects the numbers of live and dead rows in the user tables.
5283 =item B<disk_io>
5285 This query collects disk block access counts for user tables.
5287 =item B<disk_usage>
5289 This query collects the on-disk size of the database in bytes.
5291 =back
5293 In addition, the following detailed queries are available by default. Please
5294 note that each of those queries collects information B<by table>, thus,
5295 potentially producing B<a lot> of data. For details see the description of the
5296 non-by_table queries above.
5298 =over 4
5300 =item B<queries_by_table>
5302 =item B<query_plans_by_table>
5304 =item B<table_states_by_table>
5306 =item B<disk_io_by_table>
5308 =back
5310 The B<Writer> block defines a PostgreSQL writer backend. It accepts a single
5311 mandatory argument specifying the name of the writer. This will then be used
5312 in the B<Database> specification in order to activate the writer instance. The
5313 names of all writers have to be unique. The following options may be
5314 specified:
5316 =over 4
5318 =item B<Statement> I<sql statement>
5320 This mandatory option specifies the SQL statement that will be executed for
5321 each submitted value. A single SQL statement is allowed only. Anything after
5322 the first semicolon will be ignored.
5324 Nine parameters will be passed to the statement and should be specified as
5325 tokens B<$1>, B<$2>, through B<$9> in the statement string. The following
5326 values are made available through those parameters:
5328 =over 4
5330 =item B<$1>
5332 The timestamp of the queried value as a floating point number.
5334 =item B<$2>
5336 The hostname of the queried value.
5338 =item B<$3>
5340 The plugin name of the queried value.
5342 =item B<$4>
5344 The plugin instance of the queried value. This value may be B<NULL> if there
5345 is no plugin instance.
5347 =item B<$5>
5349 The type of the queried value (cf. L<types.db(5)>).
5351 =item B<$6>
5353 The type instance of the queried value. This value may be B<NULL> if there is
5354 no type instance.
5356 =item B<$7>
5358 An array of names for the submitted values (i.E<nbsp>e., the name of the data
5359 sources of the submitted value-list).
5361 =item B<$8>
5363 An array of types for the submitted values (i.E<nbsp>e., the type of the data
5364 sources of the submitted value-list; C<counter>, C<gauge>, ...). Note, that if
5365 B<StoreRates> is enabled (which is the default, see below), all types will be
5366 C<gauge>.
5368 =item B<$9>
5370 An array of the submitted values. The dimensions of the value name and value
5371 arrays match.
5373 =back
5375 In general, it is advisable to create and call a custom function in the
5376 PostgreSQL database for this purpose. Any procedural language supported by
5377 PostgreSQL will do (see chapter "Server Programming" in the PostgreSQL manual
5378 for details).
5380 =item B<StoreRates> B<false>|B<true>
5382 If set to B<true> (the default), convert counter values to rates. If set to
5383 B<false> counter values are stored as is, i.E<nbsp>e. as an increasing integer
5384 number.
5386 =back
5388 The B<Database> block defines one PostgreSQL database for which to collect
5389 statistics. It accepts a single mandatory argument which specifies the
5390 database name. None of the other options are required. PostgreSQL will use
5391 default values as documented in the section "CONNECTING TO A DATABASE" in the
5392 L<psql(1)> manpage. However, be aware that those defaults may be influenced by
5393 the user collectd is run as and special environment variables. See the manpage
5394 for details.
5396 =over 4
5398 =item B<Interval> I<seconds>
5400 Specify the interval with which the database should be queried. The default is
5401 to use the global B<Interval> setting.
5403 =item B<CommitInterval> I<seconds>
5405 This option may be used for database connections which have "writers" assigned
5406 (see above). If specified, it causes a writer to put several updates into a
5407 single transaction. This transaction will last for the specified amount of
5408 time. By default, each update will be executed in a separate transaction. Each
5409 transaction generates a fair amount of overhead which can, thus, be reduced by
5410 activating this option. The draw-back is, that data covering the specified
5411 amount of time will be lost, for example, if a single statement within the
5412 transaction fails or if the database server crashes.
5414 =item B<Instance> I<name>
5416 Specify the plugin instance name that should be used instead of the database
5417 name (which is the default, if this option has not been specified). This
5418 allows to query multiple databases of the same name on the same host (e.g.
5419 when running multiple database server versions in parallel).
5421 =item B<Host> I<hostname>
5423 Specify the hostname or IP of the PostgreSQL server to connect to. If the
5424 value begins with a slash, it is interpreted as the directory name in which to
5425 look for the UNIX domain socket.
5427 This option is also used to determine the hostname that is associated with a
5428 collected data set. If it has been omitted or either begins with with a slash
5429 or equals B<localhost> it will be replaced with the global hostname definition
5430 of collectd. Any other value will be passed literally to collectd when
5431 dispatching values. Also see the global B<Hostname> and B<FQDNLookup> options.
5433 =item B<Port> I<port>
5435 Specify the TCP port or the local UNIX domain socket file extension of the
5436 server.
5438 =item B<User> I<username>
5440 Specify the username to be used when connecting to the server.
5442 =item B<Password> I<password>
5444 Specify the password to be used when connecting to the server.
5446 =item B<ExpireDelay> I<delay>
5448 Skip expired values in query output.
5450 =item B<SSLMode> I<disable>|I<allow>|I<prefer>|I<require>
5452 Specify whether to use an SSL connection when contacting the server. The
5453 following modes are supported:
5455 =over 4
5457 =item I<disable>
5459 Do not use SSL at all.
5461 =item I<allow>
5463 First, try to connect without using SSL. If that fails, try using SSL.
5465 =item I<prefer> (default)
5467 First, try to connect using SSL. If that fails, try without using SSL.
5469 =item I<require>
5471 Use SSL only.
5473 =back
5475 =item B<Instance> I<name>
5477 Specify the plugin instance name that should be used instead of the database
5478 name (which is the default, if this option has not been specified). This
5479 allows to query multiple databases of the same name on the same host (e.g.
5480 when running multiple database server versions in parallel).
5482 =item B<KRBSrvName> I<kerberos_service_name>
5484 Specify the Kerberos service name to use when authenticating with Kerberos 5
5485 or GSSAPI. See the sections "Kerberos authentication" and "GSSAPI" of the
5486 B<PostgreSQL Documentation> for details.
5488 =item B<Service> I<service_name>
5490 Specify the PostgreSQL service name to use for additional parameters. That
5491 service has to be defined in F<pg_service.conf> and holds additional
5492 connection parameters. See the section "The Connection Service File" in the
5493 B<PostgreSQL Documentation> for details.
5495 =item B<Query> I<query>
5497 Specifies a I<query> which should be executed in the context of the database
5498 connection. This may be any of the predefined or user-defined queries. If no
5499 such option is given, it defaults to "backends", "transactions", "queries",
5500 "query_plans", "table_states", "disk_io" and "disk_usage" (unless a B<Writer>
5501 has been specified). Else, the specified queries are used only.
5503 =item B<Writer> I<writer>
5505 Assigns the specified I<writer> backend to the database connection. This
5506 causes all collected data to be send to the database using the settings
5507 defined in the writer configuration (see the section "FILTER CONFIGURATION"
5508 below for details on how to selectively send data to certain plugins).
5510 Each writer will register a flush callback which may be used when having long
5511 transactions enabled (see the B<CommitInterval> option above). When issuing
5512 the B<FLUSH> command (see L<collectd-unixsock(5)> for details) the current
5513 transaction will be committed right away. Two different kinds of flush
5514 callbacks are available with the C<postgresql> plugin:
5516 =over 4
5518 =item B<postgresql>
5520 Flush all writer backends.
5522 =item B<postgresql->I<database>
5524 Flush all writers of the specified I<database> only.
5526 =back
5528 =back
5530 =head2 Plugin C<powerdns>
5532 The C<powerdns> plugin queries statistics from an authoritative PowerDNS
5533 nameserver and/or a PowerDNS recursor. Since both offer a wide variety of
5534 values, many of which are probably meaningless to most users, but may be useful
5535 for some. So you may chose which values to collect, but if you don't, some
5536 reasonable defaults will be collected.
5538 <Plugin "powerdns">
5539 <Server "server_name">
5540 Collect "latency"
5541 Collect "udp-answers" "udp-queries"
5542 Socket "/var/run/pdns.controlsocket"
5543 </Server>
5544 <Recursor "recursor_name">
5545 Collect "questions"
5546 Collect "cache-hits" "cache-misses"
5547 Socket "/var/run/pdns_recursor.controlsocket"
5548 </Recursor>
5549 LocalSocket "/opt/collectd/var/run/collectd-powerdns"
5550 </Plugin>
5552 =over 4
5554 =item B<Server> and B<Recursor> block
5556 The B<Server> block defines one authoritative server to query, the B<Recursor>
5557 does the same for an recursing server. The possible options in both blocks are
5558 the same, though. The argument defines a name for the serverE<nbsp>/ recursor
5559 and is required.
5561 =over 4
5563 =item B<Collect> I<Field>
5565 Using the B<Collect> statement you can select which values to collect. Here,
5566 you specify the name of the values as used by the PowerDNS servers, e.E<nbsp>g.
5567 C<dlg-only-drops>, C<answers10-100>.
5569 The method of getting the values differs for B<Server> and B<Recursor> blocks:
5570 When querying the server a C<SHOW *> command is issued in any case, because
5571 that's the only way of getting multiple values out of the server at once.
5572 collectd then picks out the values you have selected. When querying the
5573 recursor, a command is generated to query exactly these values. So if you
5574 specify invalid fields when querying the recursor, a syntax error may be
5575 returned by the daemon and collectd may not collect any values at all.
5577 If no B<Collect> statement is given, the following B<Server> values will be
5578 collected:
5580 =over 4
5582 =item latency
5584 =item packetcache-hit
5586 =item packetcache-miss
5588 =item packetcache-size
5590 =item query-cache-hit
5592 =item query-cache-miss
5594 =item recursing-answers
5596 =item recursing-questions
5598 =item tcp-answers
5600 =item tcp-queries
5602 =item udp-answers
5604 =item udp-queries
5606 =back
5608 The following B<Recursor> values will be collected by default:
5610 =over 4
5612 =item noerror-answers
5614 =item nxdomain-answers
5616 =item servfail-answers
5618 =item sys-msec
5620 =item user-msec
5622 =item qa-latency
5624 =item cache-entries
5626 =item cache-hits
5628 =item cache-misses
5630 =item questions
5632 =back
5634 Please note that up to that point collectd doesn't know what values are
5635 available on the server and values that are added do not need a change of the
5636 mechanism so far. However, the values must be mapped to collectd's naming
5637 scheme, which is done using a lookup table that lists all known values. If
5638 values are added in the future and collectd does not know about them, you will
5639 get an error much like this:
5641 powerdns plugin: submit: Not found in lookup table: foobar = 42
5643 In this case please file a bug report with the collectd team.
5645 =item B<Socket> I<Path>
5647 Configures the path to the UNIX domain socket to be used when connecting to the
5648 daemon. By default C<${localstatedir}/run/pdns.controlsocket> will be used for
5649 an authoritative server and C<${localstatedir}/run/pdns_recursor.controlsocket>
5650 will be used for the recursor.
5652 =back
5654 =item B<LocalSocket> I<Path>
5656 Querying the recursor is done using UDP. When using UDP over UNIX domain
5657 sockets, the client socket needs a name in the file system, too. You can set
5658 this local name to I<Path> using the B<LocalSocket> option. The default is
5659 C<I<prefix>/var/run/collectd-powerdns>.
5661 =back
5663 =head2 Plugin C<processes>
5665 =over 4
5667 =item B<Process> I<Name>
5669 Select more detailed statistics of processes matching this name. The statistics
5670 collected for these selected processes are size of the resident segment size
5671 (RSS), user- and system-time used, number of processes and number of threads,
5672 io data (where available) and minor and major pagefaults.
5674 =item B<ProcessMatch> I<name> I<regex>
5676 Similar to the B<Process> option this allows to select more detailed
5677 statistics of processes matching the specified I<regex> (see L<regex(7)> for
5678 details). The statistics of all matching processes are summed up and
5679 dispatched to the daemon using the specified I<name> as an identifier. This
5680 allows to "group" several processes together. I<name> must not contain
5681 slashes.
5683 =item B<CollectContextSwitch> I<Boolean>
5685 Collect context switch of the process.
5687 =back
5689 =head2 Plugin C<protocols>
5691 Collects a lot of information about various network protocols, such as I<IP>,
5692 I<TCP>, I<UDP>, etc.
5694 Available configuration options:
5696 =over 4
5698 =item B<Value> I<Selector>
5700 Selects whether or not to select a specific value. The string being matched is
5701 of the form "I<Protocol>:I<ValueName>", where I<Protocol> will be used as the
5702 plugin instance and I<ValueName> will be used as type instance. An example of
5703 the string being used would be C<Tcp:RetransSegs>.
5705 You can use regular expressions to match a large number of values with just one
5706 configuration option. To select all "extended" I<TCP> values, you could use the
5707 following statement:
5709 Value "/^TcpExt:/"
5711 Whether only matched values are selected or all matched values are ignored
5712 depends on the B<IgnoreSelected>. By default, only matched values are selected.
5713 If no value is configured at all, all values will be selected.
5715 =item B<IgnoreSelected> B<true>|B<false>
5717 If set to B<true>, inverts the selection made by B<Value>, i.E<nbsp>e. all
5718 matching values will be ignored.
5720 =back
5722 =head2 Plugin C<python>
5724 This plugin embeds a Python-interpreter into collectd and provides an interface
5725 to collectd's plugin system. See L<collectd-python(5)> for its documentation.
5727 =head2 Plugin C<routeros>
5729 The C<routeros> plugin connects to a device running I<RouterOS>, the
5730 Linux-based operating system for routers by I<MikroTik>. The plugin uses
5731 I<librouteros> to connect and reads information about the interfaces and
5732 wireless connections of the device. The configuration supports querying
5733 multiple routers:
5735 <Plugin "routeros">
5736 <Router>
5737 Host "router0.example.com"
5738 User "collectd"
5739 Password "secr3t"
5740 CollectInterface true
5741 CollectCPULoad true
5742 CollectMemory true
5743 </Router>
5744 <Router>
5745 Host "router1.example.com"
5746 User "collectd"
5747 Password "5ecret"
5748 CollectInterface true
5749 CollectRegistrationTable true
5750 CollectDF true
5751 CollectDisk true
5752 </Router>
5753 </Plugin>
5755 As you can see above, the configuration of the I<routeros> plugin consists of
5756 one or more B<E<lt>RouterE<gt>> blocks. Within each block, the following
5757 options are understood:
5759 =over 4
5761 =item B<Host> I<Host>
5763 Hostname or IP-address of the router to connect to.
5765 =item B<Port> I<Port>
5767 Port name or port number used when connecting. If left unspecified, the default
5768 will be chosen by I<librouteros>, currently "8728". This option expects a
5769 string argument, even when a numeric port number is given.
5771 =item B<User> I<User>
5773 Use the user name I<User> to authenticate. Defaults to "admin".
5775 =item B<Password> I<Password>
5777 Set the password used to authenticate.
5779 =item B<CollectInterface> B<true>|B<false>
5781 When set to B<true>, interface statistics will be collected for all interfaces
5782 present on the device. Defaults to B<false>.
5784 =item B<CollectRegistrationTable> B<true>|B<false>
5786 When set to B<true>, information about wireless LAN connections will be
5787 collected. Defaults to B<false>.
5789 =item B<CollectCPULoad> B<true>|B<false>
5791 When set to B<true>, information about the CPU usage will be collected. The
5792 number is a dimensionless value where zero indicates no CPU usage at all.
5793 Defaults to B<false>.
5795 =item B<CollectMemory> B<true>|B<false>
5797 When enabled, the amount of used and free memory will be collected. How used
5798 memory is calculated is unknown, for example whether or not caches are counted
5799 as used space.
5800 Defaults to B<false>.
5802 =item B<CollectDF> B<true>|B<false>
5804 When enabled, the amount of used and free disk space will be collected.
5805 Defaults to B<false>.
5807 =item B<CollectDisk> B<true>|B<false>
5809 When enabled, the number of sectors written and bad blocks will be collected.
5810 Defaults to B<false>.
5812 =back
5814 =head2 Plugin C<redis>
5816 The I<Redis plugin> connects to one or more Redis servers and gathers
5817 information about each server's state. For each server there is a I<Node> block
5818 which configures the connection parameters for this node.
5820 <Plugin redis>
5821 <Node "example">
5822 Host "localhost"
5823 Port "6379"
5824 Timeout 2000
5825 <Query "LLEN myqueue">
5826 Type "queue_length"
5827 Instance "myqueue"
5828 <Query>
5829 </Node>
5830 </Plugin>
5832 The information shown in the synopsis above is the I<default configuration>
5833 which is used by the plugin if no configuration is present.
5835 =over 4
5837 =item B<Node> I<Nodename>
5839 The B<Node> block identifies a new Redis node, that is a new Redis instance
5840 running in an specified host and port. The name for node is a canonical
5841 identifier which is used as I<plugin instance>. It is limited to
5842 64E<nbsp>characters in length.
5844 =item B<Host> I<Hostname>
5846 The B<Host> option is the hostname or IP-address where the Redis instance is
5847 running on.
5849 =item B<Port> I<Port>
5851 The B<Port> option is the TCP port on which the Redis instance accepts
5852 connections. Either a service name of a port number may be given. Please note
5853 that numerical port numbers must be given as a string, too.
5855 =item B<Password> I<Password>
5857 Use I<Password> to authenticate when connecting to I<Redis>.
5859 =item B<Timeout> I<Milliseconds>
5861 The B<Timeout> option set the socket timeout for node response. Since the Redis
5862 read function is blocking, you should keep this value as low as possible. Keep
5863 in mind that the sum of all B<Timeout> values for all B<Nodes> should be lower
5864 than B<Interval> defined globally.
5866 =item B<Query> I<Querystring>
5868 The B<Query> block identifies a query to execute against the redis server.
5869 There may be an arbitrary number of queries to execute.
5871 =item B<Type> I<Collectd type>
5873 Within a query definition, a valid collectd type to use as when submitting
5874 the result of the query. When not supplied, will default to B<gauge>.
5876 =item B<Instance> I<Type instance>
5878 Within a query definition, an optional type instance to use when submitting
5879 the result of the query. When not supplied will default to the escaped
5880 command, up to 64 chars.
5882 =back
5884 =head2 Plugin C<rrdcached>
5886 The C<rrdcached> plugin uses the RRDtool accelerator daemon, L<rrdcached(1)>,
5887 to store values to RRD files in an efficient manner. The combination of the
5888 C<rrdcached> B<plugin> and the C<rrdcached> B<daemon> is very similar to the
5889 way the C<rrdtool> plugin works (see below). The added abstraction layer
5890 provides a number of benefits, though: Because the cache is not within
5891 C<collectd> anymore, it does not need to be flushed when C<collectd> is to be
5892 restarted. This results in much shorter (if any) gaps in graphs, especially
5893 under heavy load. Also, the C<rrdtool> command line utility is aware of the
5894 daemon so that it can flush values to disk automatically when needed. This
5895 allows to integrate automated flushing of values into graphing solutions much
5896 more easily.
5898 There are disadvantages, though: The daemon may reside on a different host, so
5899 it may not be possible for C<collectd> to create the appropriate RRD files
5900 anymore. And even if C<rrdcached> runs on the same host, it may run in a
5901 different base directory, so relative paths may do weird stuff if you're not
5902 careful.
5904 So the B<recommended configuration> is to let C<collectd> and C<rrdcached> run
5905 on the same host, communicating via a UNIX domain socket. The B<DataDir>
5906 setting should be set to an absolute path, so that a changed base directory
5907 does not result in RRD files being createdE<nbsp>/ expected in the wrong place.
5909 =over 4
5911 =item B<DaemonAddress> I<Address>
5913 Address of the daemon as understood by the C<rrdc_connect> function of the RRD
5914 library. See L<rrdcached(1)> for details. Example:
5916 <Plugin "rrdcached">
5917 DaemonAddress "unix:/var/run/rrdcached.sock"
5918 </Plugin>
5920 =item B<DataDir> I<Directory>
5922 Set the base directory in which the RRD files reside. If this is a relative
5923 path, it is relative to the working base directory of the C<rrdcached> daemon!
5924 Use of an absolute path is recommended.
5926 =item B<CreateFiles> B<true>|B<false>
5928 Enables or disables the creation of RRD files. If the daemon is not running
5929 locally, or B<DataDir> is set to a relative path, this will not work as
5930 expected. Default is B<true>.
5932 =item B<CreateFilesAsync> B<false>|B<true>
5934 When enabled, new RRD files are enabled asynchronously, using a separate thread
5935 that runs in the background. This prevents writes to block, which is a problem
5936 especially when many hundreds of files need to be created at once. However,
5937 since the purpose of creating the files asynchronously is I<not> to block until
5938 the file is available, values before the file is available will be discarded.
5939 When disabled (the default) files are created synchronously, blocking for a
5940 short while, while the file is being written.
5942 =item B<StepSize> I<Seconds>
5944 B<Force> the stepsize of newly created RRD-files. Ideally (and per default)
5945 this setting is unset and the stepsize is set to the interval in which the data
5946 is collected. Do not use this option unless you absolutely have to for some
5947 reason. Setting this option may cause problems with the C<snmp plugin>, the
5948 C<exec plugin> or when the daemon is set up to receive data from other hosts.
5950 =item B<HeartBeat> I<Seconds>
5952 B<Force> the heartbeat of newly created RRD-files. This setting should be unset
5953 in which case the heartbeat is set to twice the B<StepSize> which should equal
5954 the interval in which data is collected. Do not set this option unless you have
5955 a very good reason to do so.
5957 =item B<RRARows> I<NumRows>
5959 The C<rrdtool plugin> calculates the number of PDPs per CDP based on the
5960 B<StepSize>, this setting and a timespan. This plugin creates RRD-files with
5961 three times five RRAs, i. e. five RRAs with the CFs B<MIN>, B<AVERAGE>, and
5962 B<MAX>. The five RRAs are optimized for graphs covering one hour, one day, one
5963 week, one month, and one year.
5965 So for each timespan, it calculates how many PDPs need to be consolidated into
5966 one CDP by calculating:
5967 number of PDPs = timespan / (stepsize * rrarows)
5969 Bottom line is, set this no smaller than the width of you graphs in pixels. The
5970 default is 1200.
5972 =item B<RRATimespan> I<Seconds>
5974 Adds an RRA-timespan, given in seconds. Use this option multiple times to have
5975 more then one RRA. If this option is never used, the built-in default of (3600,
5976 86400, 604800, 2678400, 31622400) is used.
5978 For more information on how RRA-sizes are calculated see B<RRARows> above.
5980 =item B<XFF> I<Factor>
5982 Set the "XFiles Factor". The default is 0.1. If unsure, don't set this option.
5983 I<Factor> must be in the range C<[0.0-1.0)>, i.e. between zero (inclusive) and
5984 one (exclusive).
5986 =item B<CollectStatistics> B<false>|B<true>
5988 When set to B<true>, various statistics about the I<rrdcached> daemon will be
5989 collected, with "rrdcached" as the I<plugin name>. Defaults to B<false>.
5991 Statistics are read via I<rrdcached>s socket using the STATS command.
5992 See L<rrdcached(1)> for details.
5994 =back
5996 =head2 Plugin C<rrdtool>
5998 You can use the settings B<StepSize>, B<HeartBeat>, B<RRARows>, and B<XFF> to
5999 fine-tune your RRD-files. Please read L<rrdcreate(1)> if you encounter problems
6000 using these settings. If you don't want to dive into the depths of RRDtool, you
6001 can safely ignore these settings.
6003 =over 4
6005 =item B<DataDir> I<Directory>
6007 Set the directory to store RRD files under. By default RRD files are generated
6008 beneath the daemon's working directory, i.e. the B<BaseDir>.
6010 =item B<CreateFilesAsync> B<false>|B<true>
6012 When enabled, new RRD files are enabled asynchronously, using a separate thread
6013 that runs in the background. This prevents writes to block, which is a problem
6014 especially when many hundreds of files need to be created at once. However,
6015 since the purpose of creating the files asynchronously is I<not> to block until
6016 the file is available, values before the file is available will be discarded.
6017 When disabled (the default) files are created synchronously, blocking for a
6018 short while, while the file is being written.
6020 =item B<StepSize> I<Seconds>
6022 B<Force> the stepsize of newly created RRD-files. Ideally (and per default)
6023 this setting is unset and the stepsize is set to the interval in which the data
6024 is collected. Do not use this option unless you absolutely have to for some
6025 reason. Setting this option may cause problems with the C<snmp plugin>, the
6026 C<exec plugin> or when the daemon is set up to receive data from other hosts.
6028 =item B<HeartBeat> I<Seconds>
6030 B<Force> the heartbeat of newly created RRD-files. This setting should be unset
6031 in which case the heartbeat is set to twice the B<StepSize> which should equal
6032 the interval in which data is collected. Do not set this option unless you have
6033 a very good reason to do so.
6035 =item B<RRARows> I<NumRows>
6037 The C<rrdtool plugin> calculates the number of PDPs per CDP based on the
6038 B<StepSize>, this setting and a timespan. This plugin creates RRD-files with
6039 three times five RRAs, i.e. five RRAs with the CFs B<MIN>, B<AVERAGE>, and
6040 B<MAX>. The five RRAs are optimized for graphs covering one hour, one day, one
6041 week, one month, and one year.
6043 So for each timespan, it calculates how many PDPs need to be consolidated into
6044 one CDP by calculating:
6045 number of PDPs = timespan / (stepsize * rrarows)
6047 Bottom line is, set this no smaller than the width of you graphs in pixels. The
6048 default is 1200.
6050 =item B<RRATimespan> I<Seconds>
6052 Adds an RRA-timespan, given in seconds. Use this option multiple times to have
6053 more then one RRA. If this option is never used, the built-in default of (3600,
6054 86400, 604800, 2678400, 31622400) is used.
6056 For more information on how RRA-sizes are calculated see B<RRARows> above.
6058 =item B<XFF> I<Factor>
6060 Set the "XFiles Factor". The default is 0.1. If unsure, don't set this option.
6061 I<Factor> must be in the range C<[0.0-1.0)>, i.e. between zero (inclusive) and
6062 one (exclusive).
6064 =item B<CacheFlush> I<Seconds>
6066 When the C<rrdtool> plugin uses a cache (by setting B<CacheTimeout>, see below)
6067 it writes all values for a certain RRD-file if the oldest value is older than
6068 (or equal to) the number of seconds specified. If some RRD-file is not updated
6069 anymore for some reason (the computer was shut down, the network is broken,
6070 etc.) some values may still be in the cache. If B<CacheFlush> is set, then the
6071 entire cache is searched for entries older than B<CacheTimeout> seconds and
6072 written to disk every I<Seconds> seconds. Since this is kind of expensive and
6073 does nothing under normal circumstances, this value should not be too small.
6074 900 seconds might be a good value, though setting this to 7200 seconds doesn't
6075 normally do much harm either.
6077 =item B<CacheTimeout> I<Seconds>
6079 If this option is set to a value greater than zero, the C<rrdtool plugin> will
6080 save values in a cache, as described above. Writing multiple values at once
6081 reduces IO-operations and thus lessens the load produced by updating the files.
6082 The trade off is that the graphs kind of "drag behind" and that more memory is
6083 used.
6085 =item B<WritesPerSecond> I<Updates>
6087 When collecting many statistics with collectd and the C<rrdtool> plugin, you
6088 will run serious performance problems. The B<CacheFlush> setting and the
6089 internal update queue assert that collectd continues to work just fine even
6090 under heavy load, but the system may become very unresponsive and slow. This is
6091 a problem especially if you create graphs from the RRD files on the same
6092 machine, for example using the C<graph.cgi> script included in the
6093 C<contrib/collection3/> directory.
6095 This setting is designed for very large setups. Setting this option to a value
6096 between 25 and 80 updates per second, depending on your hardware, will leave
6097 the server responsive enough to draw graphs even while all the cached values
6098 are written to disk. Flushed values, i.E<nbsp>e. values that are forced to disk
6099 by the B<FLUSH> command, are B<not> effected by this limit. They are still
6100 written as fast as possible, so that web frontends have up to date data when
6101 generating graphs.
6103 For example: If you have 100,000 RRD files and set B<WritesPerSecond> to 30
6104 updates per second, writing all values to disk will take approximately
6105 56E<nbsp>minutes. Together with the flushing ability that's integrated into
6106 "collection3" you'll end up with a responsive and fast system, up to date
6107 graphs and basically a "backup" of your values every hour.
6109 =item B<RandomTimeout> I<Seconds>
6111 When set, the actual timeout for each value is chosen randomly between
6112 I<CacheTimeout>-I<RandomTimeout> and I<CacheTimeout>+I<RandomTimeout>. The
6113 intention is to avoid high load situations that appear when many values timeout
6114 at the same time. This is especially a problem shortly after the daemon starts,
6115 because all values were added to the internal cache at roughly the same time.
6117 =back
6119 =head2 Plugin C<sensors>
6121 The I<Sensors plugin> uses B<lm_sensors> to retrieve sensor-values. This means
6122 that all the needed modules have to be loaded and lm_sensors has to be
6123 configured (most likely by editing F</etc/sensors.conf>. Read
6124 L<sensors.conf(5)> for details.
6126 The B<lm_sensors> homepage can be found at
6127 L<http://secure.netroedge.com/~lm78/>.
6129 =over 4
6131 =item B<SensorConfigFile> I<File>
6133 Read the I<lm_sensors> configuration from I<File>. When unset (recommended),
6134 the library's default will be used.
6136 =item B<Sensor> I<chip-bus-address/type-feature>
6138 Selects the name of the sensor which you want to collect or ignore, depending
6139 on the B<IgnoreSelected> below. For example, the option "B<Sensor>
6140 I<it8712-isa-0290/voltage-in1>" will cause collectd to gather data for the
6141 voltage sensor I<in1> of the I<it8712> on the isa bus at the address 0290.
6143 =item B<IgnoreSelected> I<true>|I<false>
6145 If no configuration if given, the B<sensors>-plugin will collect data from all
6146 sensors. This may not be practical, especially for uninteresting sensors.
6147 Thus, you can use the B<Sensor>-option to pick the sensors you're interested
6148 in. Sometimes, however, it's easier/preferred to collect all sensors I<except> a
6149 few ones. This option enables you to do that: By setting B<IgnoreSelected> to
6150 I<true> the effect of B<Sensor> is inverted: All selected sensors are ignored
6151 and all other sensors are collected.
6153 =back
6155 =head2 Plugin C<sigrok>
6157 The I<sigrok plugin> uses I<libsigrok> to retrieve measurements from any device
6158 supported by the L<sigrok|http://sigrok.org/> project.
6160 B<Synopsis>
6162 <Plugin sigrok>
6163 LogLevel 3
6164 <Device "AC Voltage">
6165 Driver "fluke-dmm"
6166 MinimumInterval 10
6167 Conn "/dev/ttyUSB2"
6168 </Device>
6169 <Device "Sound Level">
6170 Driver "cem-dt-885x"
6171 Conn "/dev/ttyUSB1"
6172 </Device>
6173 </Plugin>
6175 =over 4
6177 =item B<LogLevel> B<0-5>
6179 The I<sigrok> logging level to pass on to the I<collectd> log, as a number
6180 between B<0> and B<5> (inclusive). These levels correspond to C<None>,
6181 C<Errors>, C<Warnings>, C<Informational>, C<Debug >and C<Spew>, respectively.
6182 The default is B<2> (C<Warnings>). The I<sigrok> log messages, regardless of
6183 their level, are always submitted to I<collectd> at its INFO log level.
6185 =item E<lt>B<Device> I<Name>E<gt>
6187 A sigrok-supported device, uniquely identified by this section's options. The
6188 I<Name> is passed to I<collectd> as the I<plugin instance>.
6190 =item B<Driver> I<DriverName>
6192 The sigrok driver to use for this device.
6194 =item B<Conn> I<ConnectionSpec>
6196 If the device cannot be auto-discovered, or more than one might be discovered
6197 by the driver, I<ConnectionSpec> specifies the connection string to the device.
6198 It can be of the form of a device path (e.g.E<nbsp>C</dev/ttyUSB2>), or, in
6199 case of a non-serial USB-connected device, the USB I<VendorID>B<.>I<ProductID>
6200 separated by a period (e.g.E<nbsp>C<0403.6001>). A USB device can also be
6201 specified as I<Bus>B<.>I<Address> (e.g.E<nbsp>C<1.41>).
6203 =item B<SerialComm> I<SerialSpec>
6205 For serial devices with non-standard port settings, this option can be used
6206 to specify them in a form understood by I<sigrok>, e.g.E<nbsp>C<9600/8n1>.
6207 This should not be necessary; drivers know how to communicate with devices they
6208 support.
6210 =item B<MinimumInterval> I<Seconds>
6212 Specifies the minimum time between measurement dispatches to I<collectd>, in
6213 seconds. Since some I<sigrok> supported devices can acquire measurements many
6214 times per second, it may be necessary to throttle these. For example, the
6215 I<RRD plugin> cannot process writes more than once per second.
6217 The default B<MinimumInterval> is B<0>, meaning measurements received from the
6218 device are always dispatched to I<collectd>. When throttled, unused
6219 measurements are discarded.
6221 =back
6223 =head2 Plugin C<smart>
6225 The C<smart> plugin collects SMART information from physical
6226 disks. Values collectd include temperature, power cycle count, poweron
6227 time and bad sectors. Also, all SMART attributes are collected along
6228 with the normalized current value, the worst value, the threshold and
6229 a human readable value.
6231 Using the following two options you can ignore some disks or configure the
6232 collection only of specific disks.
6234 =over 4
6236 =item B<Disk> I<Name>
6238 Select the disk I<Name>. Whether it is collected or ignored depends on the
6239 B<IgnoreSelected> setting, see below. As with other plugins that use the
6240 daemon's ignorelist functionality, a string that starts and ends with a slash
6241 is interpreted as a regular expression. Examples:
6243 Disk "sdd"
6244 Disk "/hda[34]/"
6246 =item B<IgnoreSelected> B<true>|B<false>
6248 Sets whether selected disks, i.E<nbsp>e. the ones matches by any of the B<Disk>
6249 statements, are ignored or if all other disks are ignored. The behavior
6250 (hopefully) is intuitive: If no B<Disk> option is configured, all disks are
6251 collected. If at least one B<Disk> option is given and no B<IgnoreSelected> or
6252 set to B<false>, B<only> matching disks will be collected. If B<IgnoreSelected>
6253 is set to B<true>, all disks are collected B<except> the ones matched.
6255 =back
6257 =head2 Plugin C<snmp>
6259 Since the configuration of the C<snmp plugin> is a little more complicated than
6260 other plugins, its documentation has been moved to an own manpage,
6261 L<collectd-snmp(5)>. Please see there for details.
6263 =head2 Plugin C<statsd>
6265 The I<statsd plugin> listens to a UDP socket, reads "events" in the statsd
6266 protocol and dispatches rates or other aggregates of these numbers
6267 periodically.
6269 The plugin implements the I<Counter>, I<Timer>, I<Gauge> and I<Set> types which
6270 are dispatched as the I<collectd> types C<derive>, C<latency>, C<gauge> and
6271 C<objects> respectively.
6273 The following configuration options are valid:
6275 =over 4
6277 =item B<Host> I<Host>
6279 Bind to the hostname / address I<Host>. By default, the plugin will bind to the
6280 "any" address, i.e. accept packets sent to any of the hosts addresses.
6282 =item B<Port> I<Port>
6284 UDP port to listen to. This can be either a service name or a port number.
6285 Defaults to C<8125>.
6287 =item B<DeleteCounters> B<false>|B<true>
6289 =item B<DeleteTimers> B<false>|B<true>
6291 =item B<DeleteGauges> B<false>|B<true>
6293 =item B<DeleteSets> B<false>|B<true>
6295 These options control what happens if metrics are not updated in an interval.
6296 If set to B<False>, the default, metrics are dispatched unchanged, i.e. the
6297 rate of counters and size of sets will be zero, timers report C<NaN> and gauges
6298 are unchanged. If set to B<True>, the such metrics are not dispatched and
6299 removed from the internal cache.
6301 =item B<CounterSum> B<false>|B<true>
6303 When enabled, creates a C<count> metric which reports the change since the last
6304 read. This option primarily exists for compatibility with the I<statsd>
6305 implementation by Etsy.
6307 =item B<TimerPercentile> I<Percent>
6309 Calculate and dispatch the configured percentile, i.e. compute the latency, so
6310 that I<Percent> of all reported timers are smaller than or equal to the
6311 computed latency. This is useful for cutting off the long tail latency, as it's
6312 often done in I<Service Level Agreements> (SLAs).
6314 Different percentiles can be calculated by setting this option several times.
6315 If none are specified, no percentiles are calculated / dispatched.
6317 =item B<TimerLower> B<false>|B<true>
6319 =item B<TimerUpper> B<false>|B<true>
6321 =item B<TimerSum> B<false>|B<true>
6323 =item B<TimerCount> B<false>|B<true>
6325 Calculate and dispatch various values out of I<Timer> metrics received during
6326 an interval. If set to B<False>, the default, these values aren't calculated /
6327 dispatched.
6329 =back
6331 =head2 Plugin C<swap>
6333 The I<Swap plugin> collects information about used and available swap space. On
6334 I<Linux> and I<Solaris>, the following options are available:
6336 =over 4
6338 =item B<ReportByDevice> B<false>|B<true>
6340 Configures how to report physical swap devices. If set to B<false> (the
6341 default), the summary over all swap devices is reported only, i.e. the globally
6342 used and available space over all devices. If B<true> is configured, the used
6343 and available space of each device will be reported separately.
6345 This option is only available if the I<Swap plugin> can read C</proc/swaps>
6346 (under Linux) or use the L<swapctl(2)> mechanism (under I<Solaris>).
6348 =item B<ReportBytes> B<false>|B<true>
6350 When enabled, the I<swap I/O> is reported in bytes. When disabled, the default,
6351 I<swap I/O> is reported in pages. This option is available under Linux only.
6353 =item B<ValuesAbsolute> B<true>|B<false>
6355 Enables or disables reporting of absolute swap metrics, i.e. number of I<bytes>
6356 available and used. Defaults to B<true>.
6358 =item B<ValuesPercentage> B<false>|B<true>
6360 Enables or disables reporting of relative swap metrics, i.e. I<percent>
6361 available and free. Defaults to B<false>.
6363 This is useful for deploying I<collectd> in a heterogeneous environment, where
6364 swap sizes differ and you want to specify generic thresholds or similar.
6366 =back
6368 =head2 Plugin C<syslog>
6370 =over 4
6372 =item B<LogLevel> B<debug|info|notice|warning|err>
6374 Sets the log-level. If, for example, set to B<notice>, then all events with
6375 severity B<notice>, B<warning>, or B<err> will be submitted to the
6376 syslog-daemon.
6378 Please note that B<debug> is only available if collectd has been compiled with
6379 debugging support.
6381 =item B<NotifyLevel> B<OKAY>|B<WARNING>|B<FAILURE>
6383 Controls which notifications should be sent to syslog. The default behaviour is
6384 not to send any. Less severe notifications always imply logging more severe
6385 notifications: Setting this to B<OKAY> means all notifications will be sent to
6386 syslog, setting this to B<WARNING> will send B<WARNING> and B<FAILURE>
6387 notifications but will dismiss B<OKAY> notifications. Setting this option to
6388 B<FAILURE> will only send failures to syslog.
6390 =back
6392 =head2 Plugin C<table>
6394 The C<table plugin> provides generic means to parse tabular data and dispatch
6395 user specified values. Values are selected based on column numbers. For
6396 example, this plugin may be used to get values from the Linux L<proc(5)>
6397 filesystem or CSV (comma separated values) files.
6399 <Plugin table>
6400 <Table "/proc/slabinfo">
6401 Instance "slabinfo"
6402 Separator " "
6403 <Result>
6404 Type gauge
6405 InstancePrefix "active_objs"
6406 InstancesFrom 0
6407 ValuesFrom 1
6408 </Result>
6409 <Result>
6410 Type gauge
6411 InstancePrefix "objperslab"
6412 InstancesFrom 0
6413 ValuesFrom 4
6414 </Result>
6415 </Table>
6416 </Plugin>
6418 The configuration consists of one or more B<Table> blocks, each of which
6419 configures one file to parse. Within each B<Table> block, there are one or
6420 more B<Result> blocks, which configure which data to select and how to
6421 interpret it.
6423 The following options are available inside a B<Table> block:
6425 =over 4
6427 =item B<Instance> I<instance>
6429 If specified, I<instance> is used as the plugin instance. So, in the above
6430 example, the plugin name C<table-slabinfo> would be used. If omitted, the
6431 filename of the table is used instead, with all special characters replaced
6432 with an underscore (C<_>).
6434 =item B<Separator> I<string>
6436 Any character of I<string> is interpreted as a delimiter between the different
6437 columns of the table. A sequence of two or more contiguous delimiters in the
6438 table is considered to be a single delimiter, i.E<nbsp>e. there cannot be any
6439 empty columns. The plugin uses the L<strtok_r(3)> function to parse the lines
6440 of a table - see its documentation for more details. This option is mandatory.
6442 A horizontal tab, newline and carriage return may be specified by C<\\t>,
6443 C<\\n> and C<\\r> respectively. Please note that the double backslashes are
6444 required because of collectd's config parsing.
6446 =back
6448 The following options are available inside a B<Result> block:
6450 =over 4
6452 =item B<Type> I<type>
6454 Sets the type used to dispatch the values to the daemon. Detailed information
6455 about types and their configuration can be found in L<types.db(5)>. This
6456 option is mandatory.
6458 =item B<InstancePrefix> I<prefix>
6460 If specified, prepend I<prefix> to the type instance. If omitted, only the
6461 B<InstancesFrom> option is considered for the type instance.
6463 =item B<InstancesFrom> I<column0> [I<column1> ...]
6465 If specified, the content of the given columns (identified by the column
6466 number starting at zero) will be used to create the type instance for each
6467 row. Multiple values (and the instance prefix) will be joined together with
6468 dashes (I<->) as separation character. If omitted, only the B<InstancePrefix>
6469 option is considered for the type instance.
6471 The plugin itself does not check whether or not all built instances are
6472 different. It’s your responsibility to assure that each is unique. This is
6473 especially true, if you do not specify B<InstancesFrom>: B<You> have to make
6474 sure that the table only contains one row.
6476 If neither B<InstancePrefix> nor B<InstancesFrom> is given, the type instance
6477 will be empty.
6479 =item B<ValuesFrom> I<column0> [I<column1> ...]
6481 Specifies the columns (identified by the column numbers starting at zero)
6482 whose content is used as the actual data for the data sets that are dispatched
6483 to the daemon. How many such columns you need is determined by the B<Type>
6484 setting above. If you specify too many or not enough columns, the plugin will
6485 complain about that and no data will be submitted to the daemon. The plugin
6486 uses L<strtoll(3)> and L<strtod(3)> to parse counter and gauge values
6487 respectively, so anything supported by those functions is supported by the
6488 plugin as well. This option is mandatory.
6490 =back
6492 =head2 Plugin C<tail>
6494 The C<tail plugin> follows logfiles, just like L<tail(1)> does, parses
6495 each line and dispatches found values. What is matched can be configured by the
6496 user using (extended) regular expressions, as described in L<regex(7)>.
6498 <Plugin "tail">
6499 <File "/var/log/exim4/mainlog">
6500 Instance "exim"
6501 Interval 60
6502 <Match>
6503 Regex "S=([1-9][0-9]*)"
6504 DSType "CounterAdd"
6505 Type "ipt_bytes"
6506 Instance "total"
6507 </Match>
6508 <Match>
6509 Regex "\\<R=local_user\\>"
6510 ExcludeRegex "\\<R=local_user\\>.*mail_spool defer"
6511 DSType "CounterInc"
6512 Type "counter"
6513 Instance "local_user"
6514 </Match>
6515 </File>
6516 </Plugin>
6518 The config consists of one or more B<File> blocks, each of which configures one
6519 logfile to parse. Within each B<File> block, there are one or more B<Match>
6520 blocks, which configure a regular expression to search for.
6522 The B<Instance> option in the B<File> block may be used to set the plugin
6523 instance. So in the above example the plugin name C<tail-foo> would be used.
6524 This plugin instance is for all B<Match> blocks that B<follow> it, until the
6525 next B<Instance> option. This way you can extract several plugin instances from
6526 one logfile, handy when parsing syslog and the like.
6528 The B<Interval> option allows you to define the length of time between reads. If
6529 this is not set, the default Interval will be used.
6531 Each B<Match> block has the following options to describe how the match should
6532 be performed:
6534 =over 4
6536 =item B<Regex> I<regex>
6538 Sets the regular expression to use for matching against a line. The first
6539 subexpression has to match something that can be turned into a number by
6540 L<strtoll(3)> or L<strtod(3)>, depending on the value of C<CounterAdd>, see
6541 below. Because B<extended> regular expressions are used, you do not need to use
6542 backslashes for subexpressions! If in doubt, please consult L<regex(7)>. Due to
6543 collectd's config parsing you need to escape backslashes, though. So if you
6544 want to match literal parentheses you need to do the following:
6546 Regex "SPAM \\(Score: (-?[0-9]+\\.[0-9]+)\\)"
6548 =item B<ExcludeRegex> I<regex>
6550 Sets an optional regular expression to use for excluding lines from the match.
6551 An example which excludes all connections from localhost from the match:
6553 ExcludeRegex "127\\.0\\.0\\.1"
6555 =item B<DSType> I<Type>
6557 Sets how the values are cumulated. I<Type> is one of:
6559 =over 4
6561 =item B<GaugeAverage>
6563 Calculate the average.
6565 =item B<GaugeMin>
6567 Use the smallest number only.
6569 =item B<GaugeMax>
6571 Use the greatest number only.
6573 =item B<GaugeLast>
6575 Use the last number found.
6577 =item B<CounterSet>
6579 =item B<DeriveSet>
6581 =item B<AbsoluteSet>
6583 The matched number is a counter. Simply I<sets> the internal counter to this
6584 value. Variants exist for C<COUNTER>, C<DERIVE>, and C<ABSOLUTE> data sources.
6586 =item B<GaugeAdd>
6588 =item B<CounterAdd>
6590 =item B<DeriveAdd>
6592 Add the matched value to the internal counter. In case of B<DeriveAdd>, the
6593 matched number may be negative, which will effectively subtract from the
6594 internal counter.
6596 =item B<GaugeInc>
6598 =item B<CounterInc>
6600 =item B<DeriveInc>
6602 Increase the internal counter by one. These B<DSType> are the only ones that do
6603 not use the matched subexpression, but simply count the number of matched
6604 lines. Thus, you may use a regular expression without submatch in this case.
6606 =back
6608 As you'd expect the B<Gauge*> types interpret the submatch as a floating point
6609 number, using L<strtod(3)>. The B<Counter*> and B<AbsoluteSet> types interpret
6610 the submatch as an unsigned integer using L<strtoull(3)>. The B<Derive*> types
6611 interpret the submatch as a signed integer using L<strtoll(3)>. B<CounterInc>
6612 and B<DeriveInc> do not use the submatch at all and it may be omitted in this
6613 case.
6615 =item B<Type> I<Type>
6617 Sets the type used to dispatch this value. Detailed information about types and
6618 their configuration can be found in L<types.db(5)>.
6620 =item B<Instance> I<TypeInstance>
6622 This optional setting sets the type instance to use.
6624 =back
6626 =head2 Plugin C<tail_csv>
6628 The I<tail_csv plugin> reads files in the CSV format, e.g. the statistics file
6629 written by I<Snort>.
6631 B<Synopsis:>
6633 <Plugin "tail_csv">
6634 <Metric "snort-dropped">
6635 Type "percent"
6636 Instance "dropped"
6637 Index 1
6638 </Metric>
6639 <File "/var/log/snort/snort.stats">
6640 Instance "snort-eth0"
6641 Interval 600
6642 Collect "snort-dropped"
6643 </File>
6644 </Plugin>
6646 The configuration consists of one or more B<Metric> blocks that define an index
6647 into the line of the CSV file and how this value is mapped to I<collectd's>
6648 internal representation. These are followed by one or more B<Instance> blocks
6649 which configure which file to read, in which interval and which metrics to
6650 extract.
6652 =over 4
6654 =item E<lt>B<Metric> I<Name>E<gt>
6656 The B<Metric> block configures a new metric to be extracted from the statistics
6657 file and how it is mapped on I<collectd's> data model. The string I<Name> is
6658 only used inside the B<Instance> blocks to refer to this block, so you can use
6659 one B<Metric> block for multiple CSV files.
6661 =over 4
6663 =item B<Type> I<Type>
6665 Configures which I<Type> to use when dispatching this metric. Types are defined
6666 in the L<types.db(5)> file, see the appropriate manual page for more
6667 information on specifying types. Only types with a single I<data source> are
6668 supported by the I<tail_csv plugin>. The information whether the value is an
6669 absolute value (i.e. a C<GAUGE>) or a rate (i.e. a C<DERIVE>) is taken from the
6670 I<Type's> definition.
6672 =item B<Instance> I<TypeInstance>
6674 If set, I<TypeInstance> is used to populate the type instance field of the
6675 created value lists. Otherwise, no type instance is used.
6677 =item B<ValueFrom> I<Index>
6679 Configure to read the value from the field with the zero-based index I<Index>.
6680 If the value is parsed as signed integer, unsigned integer or double depends on
6681 the B<Type> setting, see above.
6683 =back
6685 =item E<lt>B<File> I<Path>E<gt>
6687 Each B<File> block represents one CSV file to read. There must be at least one
6688 I<File> block but there can be multiple if you have multiple CSV files.
6690 =over 4
6692 =item B<Instance> I<PluginInstance>
6694 Sets the I<plugin instance> used when dispatching the values.
6696 =item B<Collect> I<Metric>
6698 Specifies which I<Metric> to collect. This option must be specified at least
6699 once, and you can use this option multiple times to specify more than one
6700 metric to be extracted from this statistic file.
6702 =item B<Interval> I<Seconds>
6704 Configures the interval in which to read values from this instance / file.
6705 Defaults to the plugin's default interval.
6707 =item B<TimeFrom> I<Index>
6709 Rather than using the local time when dispatching a value, read the timestamp
6710 from the field with the zero-based index I<Index>. The value is interpreted as
6711 seconds since epoch. The value is parsed as a double and may be factional.
6713 =back
6715 =back
6717 =head2 Plugin C<teamspeak2>
6719 The C<teamspeak2 plugin> connects to the query port of a teamspeak2 server and
6720 polls interesting global and virtual server data. The plugin can query only one
6721 physical server but unlimited virtual servers. You can use the following
6722 options to configure it:
6724 =over 4
6726 =item B<Host> I<hostname/ip>
6728 The hostname or ip which identifies the physical server.
6729 Default: 127.0.0.1
6731 =item B<Port> I<port>
6733 The query port of the physical server. This needs to be a string.
6734 Default: "51234"
6736 =item B<Server> I<port>
6738 This option has to be added once for every virtual server the plugin should
6739 query. If you want to query the virtual server on port 8767 this is what the
6740 option would look like:
6742 Server "8767"
6744 This option, although numeric, needs to be a string, i.E<nbsp>e. you B<must>
6745 use quotes around it! If no such statement is given only global information
6746 will be collected.
6748 =back
6750 =head2 Plugin C<ted>
6752 The I<TED> plugin connects to a device of "The Energy Detective", a device to
6753 measure power consumption. These devices are usually connected to a serial
6754 (RS232) or USB port. The plugin opens a configured device and tries to read the
6755 current energy readings. For more information on TED, visit
6756 L<http://www.theenergydetective.com/>.
6758 Available configuration options:
6760 =over 4
6762 =item B<Device> I<Path>
6764 Path to the device on which TED is connected. collectd will need read and write
6765 permissions on that file.
6767 Default: B</dev/ttyUSB0>
6769 =item B<Retries> I<Num>
6771 Apparently reading from TED is not that reliable. You can therefore configure a
6772 number of retries here. You only configure the I<retries> here, to if you
6773 specify zero, one reading will be performed (but no retries if that fails); if
6774 you specify three, a maximum of four readings are performed. Negative values
6775 are illegal.
6777 Default: B<0>
6779 =back
6781 =head2 Plugin C<tcpconns>
6783 The C<tcpconns plugin> counts the number of currently established TCP
6784 connections based on the local port and/or the remote port. Since there may be
6785 a lot of connections the default if to count all connections with a local port,
6786 for which a listening socket is opened. You can use the following options to
6787 fine-tune the ports you are interested in:
6789 =over 4
6791 =item B<ListeningPorts> I<true>|I<false>
6793 If this option is set to I<true>, statistics for all local ports for which a
6794 listening socket exists are collected. The default depends on B<LocalPort> and
6795 B<RemotePort> (see below): If no port at all is specifically selected, the
6796 default is to collect listening ports. If specific ports (no matter if local or
6797 remote ports) are selected, this option defaults to I<false>, i.E<nbsp>e. only
6798 the selected ports will be collected unless this option is set to I<true>
6799 specifically.
6801 =item B<LocalPort> I<Port>
6803 Count the connections to a specific local port. This can be used to see how
6804 many connections are handled by a specific daemon, e.E<nbsp>g. the mailserver.
6805 You have to specify the port in numeric form, so for the mailserver example
6806 you'd need to set B<25>.
6808 =item B<RemotePort> I<Port>
6810 Count the connections to a specific remote port. This is useful to see how
6811 much a remote service is used. This is most useful if you want to know how many
6812 connections a local service has opened to remote services, e.E<nbsp>g. how many
6813 connections a mail server or news server has to other mail or news servers, or
6814 how many connections a web proxy holds to web servers. You have to give the
6815 port in numeric form.
6817 =item B<AllPortsSummary> I<true>|I<false>
6819 If this option is set to I<true> a summary of statistics from all connections
6820 are collectd. This option defaults to I<false>.
6822 =back
6824 =head2 Plugin C<thermal>
6826 =over 4
6828 =item B<ForceUseProcfs> I<true>|I<false>
6830 By default, the I<Thermal plugin> tries to read the statistics from the Linux
6831 C<sysfs> interface. If that is not available, the plugin falls back to the
6832 C<procfs> interface. By setting this option to I<true>, you can force the
6833 plugin to use the latter. This option defaults to I<false>.
6835 =item B<Device> I<Device>
6837 Selects the name of the thermal device that you want to collect or ignore,
6838 depending on the value of the B<IgnoreSelected> option. This option may be
6839 used multiple times to specify a list of devices.
6841 =item B<IgnoreSelected> I<true>|I<false>
6843 Invert the selection: If set to true, all devices B<except> the ones that
6844 match the device names specified by the B<Device> option are collected. By
6845 default only selected devices are collected if a selection is made. If no
6846 selection is configured at all, B<all> devices are selected.
6848 =back
6850 =head2 Plugin C<threshold>
6852 The I<Threshold plugin> checks values collected or received by I<collectd>
6853 against a configurable I<threshold> and issues I<notifications> if values are
6854 out of bounds.
6856 Documentation for this plugin is available in the L<collectd-threshold(5)>
6857 manual page.
6859 =head2 Plugin C<tokyotyrant>
6861 The I<TokyoTyrant plugin> connects to a TokyoTyrant server and collects a
6862 couple metrics: number of records, and database size on disk.
6864 =over 4
6866 =item B<Host> I<Hostname/IP>
6868 The hostname or ip which identifies the server.
6869 Default: B<127.0.0.1>
6871 =item B<Port> I<Service/Port>
6873 The query port of the server. This needs to be a string, even if the port is
6874 given in its numeric form.
6875 Default: B<1978>
6877 =back
6879 =head2 Plugin C<turbostat>
6881 The I<Turbostat plugin> reads CPU frequency and C-state residency on modern
6882 Intel processors by using the new Model Specific Registers.
6884 =over 4
6886 =item B<CoreCstates> I<Bitmask(Integer)>
6888 Bitmask of the list of core C states supported by the processor.
6889 This option should only be used if the automated detection fails.
6890 Default value extracted from the cpu model and family.
6892 Currently supported C-states (by this plugin): 3, 6, 7
6894 Example: (1<<3)+(1<<6)+(1<<7) = 392 for all states
6896 =item B<PackageCstates> I<Bitmask(Integer)>
6898 Bitmask of the list of pacages C states supported by the processor.
6899 This option should only be used if the automated detection fails.
6900 Default value extracted from the cpu model and family.
6902 Currently supported C-states (by this plugin): 2, 3, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10
6904 Example: (1<<2)+(1<<3)+(1<<6)+(1<<7) = 396 for states 2, 3, 6 and 7
6906 =item B<SystemManagementInterrupt> I<true>|I<false>
6908 Boolean enabling the collection of the I/O System-Management Interrupt
6909 counter'. This option should only be used if the automated detection
6910 fails or if you want to disable this feature.
6912 =item B<DigitalTemperatureSensor> I<true>|I<false>
6914 Boolean enabling the collection of the temperature of each core.
6915 This option should only be used if the automated detectionfails or
6916 if you want to disable this feature.
6918 =item B<DigitalTemperatureSensor> I<true>|I<false>
6920 Boolean enabling the collection of the temperature of each package.
6921 This option should only be used if the automated detectionfails or
6922 if you want to disable this feature.
6924 =item B<TCCActivationTemp> I<Temperature>
6926 Thermal Control Circuit Activation Temperature of the installed
6927 CPU. This temperature is used when collecting the temperature of
6928 cores or packages. This option should only be used if the automated
6929 detection fails. Default value extracted from B<MSR_IA32_TEMPERATURE_TARGET>
6931 =item B<RunningAveragePowerLimit> I<Bitmask(Integer)>
6933 Bitmask of the list of elements to be thermally monitored. This option
6934 should only be used if the automated detection fails or if you want to
6935 disable some collections. The different bits of this bitmask accepted
6936 by this plugin are:
6938 =over 4
6940 =item 0 ('1'): Package
6942 =item 1 ('2'): DRAM
6944 =item 2 ('4'): Cores
6946 =item 3 ('8'): Embedded graphic device
6948 =back
6950 =back
6952 =head2 Plugin C<unixsock>
6954 =over 4
6956 =item B<SocketFile> I<Path>
6958 Sets the socket-file which is to be created.
6960 =item B<SocketGroup> I<Group>
6962 If running as root change the group of the UNIX-socket after it has been
6963 created. Defaults to B<collectd>.
6965 =item B<SocketPerms> I<Permissions>
6967 Change the file permissions of the UNIX-socket after it has been created. The
6968 permissions must be given as a numeric, octal value as you would pass to
6969 L<chmod(1)>. Defaults to B<0770>.
6971 =item B<DeleteSocket> B<false>|B<true>
6973 If set to B<true>, delete the socket file before calling L<bind(2)>, if a file
6974 with the given name already exists. If I<collectd> crashes a socket file may be
6975 left over, preventing the daemon from opening a new socket when restarted.
6976 Since this is potentially dangerous, this defaults to B<false>.
6978 =back
6980 =head2 Plugin C<uuid>
6982 This plugin, if loaded, causes the Hostname to be taken from the machine's
6983 UUID. The UUID is a universally unique designation for the machine, usually
6984 taken from the machine's BIOS. This is most useful if the machine is running in
6985 a virtual environment such as Xen, in which case the UUID is preserved across
6986 shutdowns and migration.
6988 The following methods are used to find the machine's UUID, in order:
6990 =over 4
6992 =item
6994 Check I</etc/uuid> (or I<UUIDFile>).
6996 =item
6998 Check for UUID from HAL (L<http://www.freedesktop.org/wiki/Software/hal>) if
6999 present.
7001 =item
7003 Check for UUID from C<dmidecode> / SMBIOS.
7005 =item
7007 Check for UUID from Xen hypervisor.
7009 =back
7011 If no UUID can be found then the hostname is not modified.
7013 =over 4
7015 =item B<UUIDFile> I<Path>
7017 Take the UUID from the given file (default I</etc/uuid>).
7019 =back
7021 =head2 Plugin C<varnish>
7023 The I<varnish plugin> collects information about Varnish, an HTTP accelerator.
7024 It collects a subset of the values displayed by L<varnishstat(1)>, and
7025 organizes them in categories which can be enabled or disabled. Currently only
7026 metrics shown in L<varnishstat(1)>'s I<MAIN> section are collected. The exact
7027 meaning of each metric can be found in L<varnish-counters(7)>.
7029 Synopsis:
7031 <Plugin "varnish">
7032 <Instance "example">
7033 CollectBackend true
7034 CollectBan false
7035 CollectCache true
7036 CollectConnections true
7037 CollectDirectorDNS false
7038 CollectESI false
7039 CollectFetch false
7040 CollectHCB false
7041 CollectObjects false
7042 CollectPurge false
7043 CollectSession false
7044 CollectSHM true
7045 CollectSMA false
7046 CollectSMS false
7047 CollectSM false
7048 CollectStruct false
7049 CollectTotals false
7050 CollectUptime false
7051 CollectVCL false
7052 CollectVSM false
7053 CollectWorkers false
7054 </Instance>
7055 </Plugin>
7057 The configuration consists of one or more E<lt>B<Instance>E<nbsp>I<Name>E<gt>
7058 blocks. I<Name> is the parameter passed to "varnishd -n". If left empty, it
7059 will collectd statistics from the default "varnishd" instance (this should work
7060 fine in most cases).
7062 Inside each E<lt>B<Instance>E<gt> blocks, the following options are recognized:
7064 =over 4
7066 =item B<CollectBackend> B<true>|B<false>
7068 Back-end connection statistics, such as successful, reused,
7069 and closed connections. True by default.
7071 =item B<CollectBan> B<true>|B<false>
7073 Statistics about ban operations, such as number of bans added, retired, and
7074 number of objects tested against ban operations. Only available with Varnish
7075 3.x and above. False by default.
7077 =item B<CollectCache> B<true>|B<false>
7079 Cache hits and misses. True by default.
7081 =item B<CollectConnections> B<true>|B<false>
7083 Number of client connections received, accepted and dropped. True by default.
7085 =item B<CollectDirectorDNS> B<true>|B<false>
7087 DNS director lookup cache statistics. Only available with Varnish 3.x. False by
7088 default.
7090 =item B<CollectESI> B<true>|B<false>
7092 Edge Side Includes (ESI) parse statistics. False by default.
7094 =item B<CollectFetch> B<true>|B<false>
7096 Statistics about fetches (HTTP requests sent to the backend). False by default.
7098 =item B<CollectHCB> B<true>|B<false>
7100 Inserts and look-ups in the crit bit tree based hash. Look-ups are
7101 divided into locked and unlocked look-ups. False by default.
7103 =item B<CollectObjects> B<true>|B<false>
7105 Statistics on cached objects: number of objects expired, nuked (prematurely
7106 expired), saved, moved, etc. False by default.
7108 =item B<CollectPurge> B<true>|B<false>
7110 Statistics about purge operations, such as number of purges added, retired, and
7111 number of objects tested against purge operations. Only available with Varnish
7112 2.x. False by default.
7114 =item B<CollectSession> B<true>|B<false>
7116 Client session statistics. Number of past and current sessions, session herd and
7117 linger counters, etc. False by default. Note that if using Varnish 4.x, some
7118 metrics found in the Connections and Threads sections with previous versions of
7119 Varnish have been moved here.
7121 =item B<CollectSHM> B<true>|B<false>
7123 Statistics about the shared memory log, a memory region to store
7124 log messages which is flushed to disk when full. True by default.
7126 =item B<CollectSMA> B<true>|B<false>
7128 malloc or umem (umem_alloc(3MALLOC) based) storage statistics. The umem storage
7129 component is Solaris specific. Only available with Varnish 2.x. False by
7130 default.
7132 =item B<CollectSMS> B<true>|B<false>
7134 synth (synthetic content) storage statistics. This storage
7135 component is used internally only. False by default.
7137 =item B<CollectSM> B<true>|B<false>
7139 file (memory mapped file) storage statistics. Only available with Varnish 2.x.
7140 False by default.
7142 =item B<CollectStruct> B<true>|B<false>
7144 Current varnish internal state statistics. Number of current sessions, objects
7145 in cache store, open connections to backends (with Varnish 2.x), etc. False by
7146 default.
7148 =item B<CollectTotals> B<true>|B<false>
7150 Collects overview counters, such as the number of sessions created,
7151 the number of requests and bytes transferred. False by default.
7153 =item B<CollectUptime> B<true>|B<false>
7155 Varnish uptime. Only available with Varnish 3.x and above. False by default.
7157 =item B<CollectVCL> B<true>|B<false>
7159 Number of total (available + discarded) VCL (config files). False by default.
7161 =item B<CollectVSM> B<true>|B<false>
7163 Collect statistics about Varnish's shared memory usage (used by the logging and
7164 statistics subsystems). Only available with Varnish 4.x. False by default.
7166 =item B<CollectWorkers> B<true>|B<false>
7168 Collect statistics about worker threads. False by default.
7170 =back
7172 =head2 Plugin C<virt>
7174 This plugin allows CPU, disk and network load to be collected for virtualized
7175 guests on the machine. This means that these metrics can be collected for guest
7176 systems without installing any software on them - I<collectd> only runs on the
7177 host system. The statistics are collected through libvirt
7178 (L<http://libvirt.org/>).
7180 Only I<Connection> is required.
7182 =over 4
7184 =item B<Connection> I<uri>
7186 Connect to the hypervisor given by I<uri>. For example if using Xen use:
7188 Connection "xen:///"
7190 Details which URIs allowed are given at L<http://libvirt.org/uri.html>.
7192 =item B<RefreshInterval> I<seconds>
7194 Refresh the list of domains and devices every I<seconds>. The default is 60
7195 seconds. Setting this to be the same or smaller than the I<Interval> will cause
7196 the list of domains and devices to be refreshed on every iteration.
7198 Refreshing the devices in particular is quite a costly operation, so if your
7199 virtualization setup is static you might consider increasing this. If this
7200 option is set to 0, refreshing is disabled completely.
7202 =item B<Domain> I<name>
7204 =item B<BlockDevice> I<name:dev>
7206 =item B<InterfaceDevice> I<name:dev>
7208 =item B<IgnoreSelected> B<true>|B<false>
7210 Select which domains and devices are collected.
7212 If I<IgnoreSelected> is not given or B<false> then only the listed domains and
7213 disk/network devices are collected.
7215 If I<IgnoreSelected> is B<true> then the test is reversed and the listed
7216 domains and disk/network devices are ignored, while the rest are collected.
7218 The domain name and device names may use a regular expression, if the name is
7219 surrounded by I</.../> and collectd was compiled with support for regexps.
7221 The default is to collect statistics for all domains and all their devices.
7223 Example:
7225 BlockDevice "/:hdb/"
7226 IgnoreSelected "true"
7228 Ignore all I<hdb> devices on any domain, but other block devices (eg. I<hda>)
7229 will be collected.
7231 =item B<HostnameFormat> B<name|uuid|hostname|...>
7233 When the virt plugin logs data, it sets the hostname of the collected data
7234 according to this setting. The default is to use the guest name as provided by
7235 the hypervisor, which is equal to setting B<name>.
7237 B<uuid> means use the guest's UUID. This is useful if you want to track the
7238 same guest across migrations.
7240 B<hostname> means to use the global B<Hostname> setting, which is probably not
7241 useful on its own because all guests will appear to have the same name.
7243 You can also specify combinations of these fields. For example B<name uuid>
7244 means to concatenate the guest name and UUID (with a literal colon character
7245 between, thus I<"foo:1234-1234-1234-1234">).
7247 At the moment of writing (collectd-5.5), hostname string is limited to 62
7248 characters. In case when combination of fields exceeds 62 characters,
7249 hostname will be truncated without a warning.
7251 =item B<InterfaceFormat> B<name>|B<address>
7253 When the virt plugin logs interface data, it sets the name of the collected
7254 data according to this setting. The default is to use the path as provided by
7255 the hypervisor (the "dev" property of the target node), which is equal to
7256 setting B<name>.
7258 B<address> means use the interface's mac address. This is useful since the
7259 interface path might change between reboots of a guest or across migrations.
7261 =item B<PluginInstanceFormat> B<name|uuid|none>
7263 When the virt plugin logs data, it sets the plugin_instance of the collected
7264 data according to this setting. The default is to not set the plugin_instance.
7266 B<name> means use the guest's name as provided by the hypervisor.
7267 B<uuid> means use the guest's UUID.
7269 You can also specify combinations of the B<name> and B<uuid> fields.
7270 For example B<name uuid> means to concatenate the guest name and UUID
7271 (with a literal colon character between, thus I<"foo:1234-1234-1234-1234">).
7273 =back
7275 =head2 Plugin C<vmem>
7277 The C<vmem> plugin collects information about the usage of virtual memory.
7278 Since the statistics provided by the Linux kernel are very detailed, they are
7279 collected very detailed. However, to get all the details, you have to switch
7280 them on manually. Most people just want an overview over, such as the number of
7281 pages read from swap space.
7283 =over 4
7285 =item B<Verbose> B<true>|B<false>
7287 Enables verbose collection of information. This will start collecting page
7288 "actions", e.E<nbsp>g. page allocations, (de)activations, steals and so on.
7289 Part of these statistics are collected on a "per zone" basis.
7291 =back
7293 =head2 Plugin C<vserver>
7295 This plugin doesn't have any options. B<VServer> support is only available for
7296 Linux. It cannot yet be found in a vanilla kernel, though. To make use of this
7297 plugin you need a kernel that has B<VServer> support built in, i.E<nbsp>e. you
7298 need to apply the patches and compile your own kernel, which will then provide
7299 the F</proc/virtual> filesystem that is required by this plugin.
7301 The B<VServer> homepage can be found at L<http://linux-vserver.org/>.
7303 B<Note>: The traffic collected by this plugin accounts for the amount of
7304 traffic passing a socket which might be a lot less than the actual on-wire
7305 traffic (e.E<nbsp>g. due to headers and retransmission). If you want to
7306 collect on-wire traffic you could, for example, use the logging facilities of
7307 iptables to feed data for the guest IPs into the iptables plugin.
7309 =head2 Plugin C<write_graphite>
7311 The C<write_graphite> plugin writes data to I<Graphite>, an open-source metrics
7312 storage and graphing project. The plugin connects to I<Carbon>, the data layer
7313 of I<Graphite>, via I<TCP> or I<UDP> and sends data via the "line based"
7314 protocol (per default using portE<nbsp>2003). The data will be sent in blocks
7315 of at most 1428 bytes to minimize the number of network packets.
7317 Synopsis:
7319 <Plugin write_graphite>
7320 <Node "example">
7321 Host "localhost"
7322 Port "2003"
7323 Protocol "tcp"
7324 LogSendErrors true
7325 Prefix "collectd"
7326 </Node>
7327 </Plugin>
7329 The configuration consists of one or more E<lt>B<Node>E<nbsp>I<Name>E<gt>
7330 blocks. Inside the B<Node> blocks, the following options are recognized:
7332 =over 4
7334 =item B<Host> I<Address>
7336 Hostname or address to connect to. Defaults to C<localhost>.
7338 =item B<Port> I<Service>
7340 Service name or port number to connect to. Defaults to C<2003>.
7342 =item B<Protocol> I<String>
7344 Protocol to use when connecting to I<Graphite>. Defaults to C<tcp>.
7346 =item B<ReconnectInterval> I<Seconds>
7348 When set to non-zero, forces the connection to the Graphite backend to be
7349 closed and re-opend periodically. This behavior is desirable in environments
7350 where the connection to the Graphite backend is done through load balancers,
7351 for example. When set to zero, the default, the connetion is kept open for as
7352 long as possible.
7354 =item B<LogSendErrors> B<false>|B<true>
7356 If set to B<true> (the default), logs errors when sending data to I<Graphite>.
7357 If set to B<false>, it will not log the errors. This is especially useful when
7358 using Protocol UDP since many times we want to use the "fire-and-forget"
7359 approach and logging errors fills syslog with unneeded messages.
7361 =item B<Prefix> I<String>
7363 When set, I<String> is added in front of the host name. Dots and whitespace are
7364 I<not> escaped in this string (see B<EscapeCharacter> below).
7366 =item B<Postfix> I<String>
7368 When set, I<String> is appended to the host name. Dots and whitespace are
7369 I<not> escaped in this string (see B<EscapeCharacter> below).
7371 =item B<EscapeCharacter> I<Char>
7373 I<Carbon> uses the dot (C<.>) as escape character and doesn't allow whitespace
7374 in the identifier. The B<EscapeCharacter> option determines which character
7375 dots, whitespace and control characters are replaced with. Defaults to
7376 underscore (C<_>).
7378 =item B<StoreRates> B<false>|B<true>
7380 If set to B<true> (the default), convert counter values to rates. If set to
7381 B<false> counter values are stored as is, i.E<nbsp>e. as an increasing integer
7382 number.
7384 =item B<SeparateInstances> B<false>|B<true>
7386 If set to B<true>, the plugin instance and type instance will be in their own
7387 path component, for example C<host.cpu.0.cpu.idle>. If set to B<false> (the
7388 default), the plugin and plugin instance (and likewise the type and type
7389 instance) are put into one component, for example C<host.cpu-0.cpu-idle>.
7391 =item B<AlwaysAppendDS> B<false>|B<true>
7393 If set to B<true>, append the name of the I<Data Source> (DS) to the "metric"
7394 identifier. If set to B<false> (the default), this is only done when there is
7395 more than one DS.
7397 =back
7399 =head2 Plugin C<write_tsdb>
7401 The C<write_tsdb> plugin writes data to I<OpenTSDB>, a scalable open-source
7402 time series database. The plugin connects to a I<TSD>, a masterless, no shared
7403 state daemon that ingests metrics and stores them in HBase. The plugin uses
7404 I<TCP> over the "line based" protocol with a default port 4242. The data will
7405 be sent in blocks of at most 1428 bytes to minimize the number of network
7406 packets.
7408 Synopsis:
7410 <Plugin write_tsdb>
7411 <Node "example">
7412 Host "tsd-1.my.domain"
7413 Port "4242"
7414 HostTags "status=production"
7415 </Node>
7416 </Plugin>
7418 The configuration consists of one or more E<lt>B<Node>E<nbsp>I<Name>E<gt>
7419 blocks. Inside the B<Node> blocks, the following options are recognized:
7421 =over 4
7423 =item B<Host> I<Address>
7425 Hostname or address to connect to. Defaults to C<localhost>.
7427 =item B<Port> I<Service>
7429 Service name or port number to connect to. Defaults to C<4242>.
7432 =item B<HostTags> I<String>
7434 When set, I<HostTags> is added to the end of the metric. It is intended to be
7435 used for name=value pairs that the TSD will tag the metric with. Dots and
7436 whitespace are I<not> escaped in this string.
7438 =item B<StoreRates> B<false>|B<true>
7440 If set to B<true>, convert counter values to rates. If set to B<false>
7441 (the default) counter values are stored as is, as an increasing
7442 integer number.
7444 =item B<AlwaysAppendDS> B<false>|B<true>
7446 If set the B<true>, append the name of the I<Data Source> (DS) to the "metric"
7447 identifier. If set to B<false> (the default), this is only done when there is
7448 more than one DS.
7450 =back
7452 =head2 Plugin C<write_mongodb>
7454 The I<write_mongodb plugin> will send values to I<MongoDB>, a schema-less
7455 NoSQL database.
7457 B<Synopsis:>
7459 <Plugin "write_mongodb">
7460 <Node "default">
7461 Host "localhost"
7462 Port "27017"
7463 Timeout 1000
7464 StoreRates true
7465 </Node>
7466 </Plugin>
7468 The plugin can send values to multiple instances of I<MongoDB> by specifying
7469 one B<Node> block for each instance. Within the B<Node> blocks, the following
7470 options are available:
7472 =over 4
7474 =item B<Host> I<Address>
7476 Hostname or address to connect to. Defaults to C<localhost>.
7478 =item B<Port> I<Service>
7480 Service name or port number to connect to. Defaults to C<27017>.
7482 =item B<Timeout> I<Milliseconds>
7484 Set the timeout for each operation on I<MongoDB> to I<Timeout> milliseconds.
7485 Setting this option to zero means no timeout, which is the default.
7487 =item B<StoreRates> B<false>|B<true>
7489 If set to B<true> (the default), convert counter values to rates. If set to
7490 B<false> counter values are stored as is, i.e. as an increasing integer
7491 number.
7493 =item B<Database> I<Database>
7495 =item B<User> I<User>
7497 =item B<Password> I<Password>
7499 Sets the information used when authenticating to a I<MongoDB> database. The
7500 fields are optional (in which case no authentication is attempted), but if you
7501 want to use authentication all three fields must be set.
7503 =back
7505 =head2 Plugin C<write_http>
7507 This output plugin submits values to an HTTP server using POST requests and
7508 encoding metrics with JSON or using the C<PUTVAL> command described in
7509 L<collectd-unixsock(5)>.
7511 Synopsis:
7513 <Plugin "write_http">
7514 <Node "example">
7515 URL "http://example.com/post-collectd"
7516 User "collectd"
7517 Password "weCh3ik0"
7518 Format JSON
7519 </Node>
7520 </Plugin>
7522 The plugin can send values to multiple HTTP servers by specifying one
7523 E<lt>B<Node>E<nbsp>I<Name>E<gt> block for each server. Within each B<Node>
7524 block, the following options are available:
7526 =over 4
7528 =item B<URL> I<URL>
7530 URL to which the values are submitted to. Mandatory.
7532 =item B<User> I<Username>
7534 Optional user name needed for authentication.
7536 =item B<Password> I<Password>
7538 Optional password needed for authentication.
7540 =item B<VerifyPeer> B<true>|B<false>
7542 Enable or disable peer SSL certificate verification. See
7543 L<http://curl.haxx.se/docs/sslcerts.html> for details. Enabled by default.
7545 =item B<VerifyHost> B<true|false>
7547 Enable or disable peer host name verification. If enabled, the plugin checks if
7548 the C<Common Name> or a C<Subject Alternate Name> field of the SSL certificate
7549 matches the host name provided by the B<URL> option. If this identity check
7550 fails, the connection is aborted. Obviously, only works when connecting to a
7551 SSL enabled server. Enabled by default.
7553 =item B<CACert> I<File>
7555 File that holds one or more SSL certificates. If you want to use HTTPS you will
7556 possibly need this option. What CA certificates come bundled with C<libcurl>
7557 and are checked by default depends on the distribution you use.
7559 =item B<CAPath> I<Directory>
7561 Directory holding one or more CA certificate files. You can use this if for
7562 some reason all the needed CA certificates aren't in the same file and can't be
7563 pointed to using the B<CACert> option. Requires C<libcurl> to be built against
7564 OpenSSL.
7566 =item B<ClientKey> I<File>
7568 File that holds the private key in PEM format to be used for certificate-based
7569 authentication.
7571 =item B<ClientCert> I<File>
7573 File that holds the SSL certificate to be used for certificate-based
7574 authentication.
7576 =item B<ClientKeyPass> I<Password>
7578 Password required to load the private key in B<ClientKey>.
7580 =item B<SSLVersion> B<SSLv2>|B<SSLv3>|B<TLSv1>|B<TLSv1_0>|B<TLSv1_1>|B<TLSv1_2>
7582 Define which SSL protocol version must be used. By default C<libcurl> will
7583 attempt to figure out the remote SSL protocol version. See
7584 L<curl_easy_setopt(3)> for more details.
7586 =item B<Format> B<Command>|B<JSON>
7588 Format of the output to generate. If set to B<Command>, will create output that
7589 is understood by the I<Exec> and I<UnixSock> plugins. When set to B<JSON>, will
7590 create output in the I<JavaScript Object Notation> (JSON).
7592 Defaults to B<Command>.
7594 =item B<StoreRates> B<true|false>
7596 If set to B<true>, convert counter values to rates. If set to B<false> (the
7597 default) counter values are stored as is, i.e. as an increasing integer number.
7599 =item B<BufferSize> I<Bytes>
7601 Sets the send buffer size to I<Bytes>. By increasing this buffer, less HTTP
7602 requests will be generated, but more metrics will be batched / metrics are
7603 cached for longer before being sent, introducing additional delay until they
7604 are available on the server side. I<Bytes> must be at least 1024 and cannot
7605 exceed the size of an C<int>, i.e. 2E<nbsp>GByte.
7606 Defaults to C<4096>.
7608 =item B<LowSpeedLimit> I<Bytes per Second>
7610 Sets the minimal transfer rate in I<Bytes per Second> below which the
7611 connection with the HTTP server will be considered too slow and aborted. All
7612 the data submitted over this connection will probably be lost. Defaults to 0,
7613 which means no minimum transfer rate is enforced.
7615 =item B<Timeout> I<Timeout>
7617 Sets the maximum time in milliseconds given for HTTP POST operations to
7618 complete. When this limit is reached, the POST operation will be aborted, and
7619 all the data in the current send buffer will probably be lost. Defaults to 0,
7620 which means the connection never times out.
7622 =item B<LogHttpError> B<false>|B<true>
7624 Enables printing of HTTP error code to log. Turned off by default.
7626 The C<write_http> plugin regularly submits the collected values to the HTTP
7627 server. How frequently this happens depends on how much data you are collecting
7628 and the size of B<BufferSize>. The optimal value to set B<Timeout> to is
7629 slightly below this interval, which you can estimate by monitoring the network
7630 traffic between collectd and the HTTP server.
7632 =back
7634 =head2 Plugin C<write_kafka>
7636 The I<write_kafka plugin> will send values to a I<Kafka> topic, a distributed
7637 queue.
7638 Synopsis:
7640 <Plugin "write_kafka">
7641 Property "metadata.broker.list" "broker1:9092,broker2:9092"
7642 <Topic "collectd">
7643 Format JSON
7644 </Topic>
7645 </Plugin>
7647 The following options are understood by the I<write_kafka plugin>:
7649 =over 4
7651 =item E<lt>B<Topic> I<Name>E<gt>
7653 The plugin's configuration consists of one or more B<Topic> blocks. Each block
7654 is given a unique I<Name> and specifies one kafka producer.
7655 Inside the B<Topic> block, the following per-topic options are
7656 understood:
7658 =over 4
7660 =item B<Property> I<String> I<String>
7662 Configure the named property for the current topic. Properties are
7663 forwarded to the kafka producer library B<librdkafka>.
7665 =item B<Key> I<String>
7667 Use the specified string as a partioning key for the topic. Kafka breaks
7668 topic into partitions and guarantees that for a given topology, the same
7669 consumer will be used for a specific key. The special (case insensitive)
7670 string B<Random> can be used to specify that an arbitrary partition should
7671 be used.
7673 =item B<Format> B<Command>|B<JSON>|B<Graphite>
7675 Selects the format in which messages are sent to the broker. If set to
7676 B<Command> (the default), values are sent as C<PUTVAL> commands which are
7677 identical to the syntax used by the I<Exec> and I<UnixSock plugins>.
7679 If set to B<JSON>, the values are encoded in the I<JavaScript Object Notation>,
7680 an easy and straight forward exchange format.
7682 If set to B<Graphite>, values are encoded in the I<Graphite> format, which is
7683 C<E<lt>metricE<gt> E<lt>valueE<gt> E<lt>timestampE<gt>\n>.
7685 =item B<StoreRates> B<true>|B<false>
7687 Determines whether or not C<COUNTER>, C<DERIVE> and C<ABSOLUTE> data sources
7688 are converted to a I<rate> (i.e. a C<GAUGE> value). If set to B<false> (the
7689 default), no conversion is performed. Otherwise the conversion is performed
7690 using the internal value cache.
7692 Please note that currently this option is only used if the B<Format> option has
7693 been set to B<JSON>.
7695 =item B<GraphitePrefix> (B<Format>=I<Graphite> only)
7697 A prefix can be added in the metric name when outputting in the I<Graphite>
7698 format. It's added before the I<Host> name.
7699 Metric name will be
7700 C<E<lt>prefixE<gt>E<lt>hostE<gt>E<lt>postfixE<gt>E<lt>pluginE<gt>E<lt>typeE<gt>E<lt>nameE<gt>>
7702 =item B<GraphitePostfix> (B<Format>=I<Graphite> only)
7704 A postfix can be added in the metric name when outputting in the I<Graphite>
7705 format. It's added after the I<Host> name.
7706 Metric name will be
7707 C<E<lt>prefixE<gt>E<lt>hostE<gt>E<lt>postfixE<gt>E<lt>pluginE<gt>E<lt>typeE<gt>E<lt>nameE<gt>>
7709 =item B<GraphiteEscapeChar> (B<Format>=I<Graphite> only)
7711 Specify a character to replace dots (.) in the host part of the metric name.
7712 In I<Graphite> metric name, dots are used as separators between different
7713 metric parts (host, plugin, type).
7714 Default is C<_> (I<Underscore>).
7716 =item B<GraphiteSeparateInstances> B<false>|B<true>
7718 If set to B<true>, the plugin instance and type instance will be in their own
7719 path component, for example C<host.cpu.0.cpu.idle>. If set to B<false> (the
7720 default), the plugin and plugin instance (and likewise the type and type
7721 instance) are put into one component, for example C<host.cpu-0.cpu-idle>.
7723 =item B<StoreRates> B<true>|B<false>
7725 If set to B<true> (the default), convert counter values to rates. If set to
7726 B<false> counter values are stored as is, i.e. as an increasing integer number.
7728 This will be reflected in the C<ds_type> tag: If B<StoreRates> is enabled,
7729 converted values will have "rate" appended to the data source type, e.g.
7730 C<ds_type:derive:rate>.
7732 =back
7734 =item B<Property> I<String> I<String>
7736 Configure the kafka producer through properties, you almost always will
7737 want to set B<metadata.broker.list> to your Kafka broker list.
7739 =back
7741 =head2 Plugin C<write_redis>
7743 The I<write_redis plugin> submits values to I<Redis>, a data structure server.
7745 Synopsis:
7747 <Plugin "write_redis">
7748 <Node "example">
7749 Host "localhost"
7750 Port "6379"
7751 Timeout 1000
7752 Prefix "collectd/"
7753 Database 1
7754 MaxSetSize -1
7755 StoreRates true
7756 </Node>
7757 </Plugin>
7759 Values are submitted to I<Sorted Sets>, using the metric name as the key, and
7760 the timestamp as the score. Retrieving a date range can then be done using the
7761 C<ZRANGEBYSCORE> I<Redis> command. Additionally, all the identifiers of these
7762 I<Sorted Sets> are kept in a I<Set> called C<collectd/values> (or
7763 C<${prefix}/values> if the B<Prefix> option was specified) and can be retrieved
7764 using the C<SMEMBERS> I<Redis> command. You can specify the database to use
7765 with the B<Database> parameter (default is C<0>). See
7766 L<http://redis.io/commands#sorted_set> and L<http://redis.io/commands#set> for
7767 details.
7769 The information shown in the synopsis above is the I<default configuration>
7770 which is used by the plugin if no configuration is present.
7772 The plugin can send values to multiple instances of I<Redis> by specifying
7773 one B<Node> block for each instance. Within the B<Node> blocks, the following
7774 options are available:
7776 =over 4
7778 =item B<Node> I<Nodename>
7780 The B<Node> block identifies a new I<Redis> node, that is a new I<Redis>
7781 instance running on a specified host and port. The node name is a
7782 canonical identifier which is used as I<plugin instance>. It is limited to
7783 51E<nbsp>characters in length.
7785 =item B<Host> I<Hostname>
7787 The B<Host> option is the hostname or IP-address where the I<Redis> instance is
7788 running on.
7790 =item B<Port> I<Port>
7792 The B<Port> option is the TCP port on which the Redis instance accepts
7793 connections. Either a service name of a port number may be given. Please note
7794 that numerical port numbers must be given as a string, too.
7796 =item B<Timeout> I<Milliseconds>
7798 The B<Timeout> option sets the socket connection timeout, in milliseconds.
7800 =item B<Prefix> I<Prefix>
7802 Prefix used when constructing the name of the I<Sorted Sets> and the I<Set>
7803 containing all metrics. Defaults to C<collectd/>, so metrics will have names
7804 like C<collectd/cpu-0/cpu-user>. When setting this to something different, it
7805 is recommended but not required to include a trailing slash in I<Prefix>.
7807 =item B<Database> I<Index>
7809 This index selects the redis database to use for writing operations. Defaults
7810 to C<0>.
7812 =item B<MaxSetSize> I<Items>
7814 The B<MaxSetSize> option limits the number of items that the I<Sorted Sets> can
7815 hold. Negative values for I<Items> sets no limit, which is the default behavior.
7817 =item B<StoreRates> B<true>|B<false>
7819 If set to B<true> (the default), convert counter values to rates. If set to
7820 B<false> counter values are stored as is, i.e. as an increasing integer number.
7822 =back
7824 =head2 Plugin C<write_riemann>
7826 The I<write_riemann plugin> will send values to I<Riemann>, a powerful stream
7827 aggregation and monitoring system. The plugin sends I<Protobuf> encoded data to
7828 I<Riemann> using UDP packets.
7830 Synopsis:
7832 <Plugin "write_riemann">
7833 <Node "example">
7834 Host "localhost"
7835 Port "5555"
7836 Protocol UDP
7837 StoreRates true
7838 AlwaysAppendDS false
7839 TTLFactor 2.0
7840 </Node>
7841 Tag "foobar"
7842 Attribute "foo" "bar"
7843 </Plugin>
7845 The following options are understood by the I<write_riemann plugin>:
7847 =over 4
7849 =item E<lt>B<Node> I<Name>E<gt>
7851 The plugin's configuration consists of one or more B<Node> blocks. Each block
7852 is given a unique I<Name> and specifies one connection to an instance of
7853 I<Riemann>. Indise the B<Node> block, the following per-connection options are
7854 understood:
7856 =over 4
7858 =item B<Host> I<Address>
7860 Hostname or address to connect to. Defaults to C<localhost>.
7862 =item B<Port> I<Service>
7864 Service name or port number to connect to. Defaults to C<5555>.
7866 =item B<Protocol> B<UDP>|B<TCP>
7868 Specify the protocol to use when communicating with I<Riemann>. Defaults to
7869 B<TCP>.
7871 =item B<Batch> B<true>|B<false>
7873 If set to B<true> and B<Protocol> is set to B<TCP>,
7874 events will be batched in memory and flushed at
7875 regular intervals or when B<BatchMaxSize> is exceeded.
7877 Notifications are not batched and sent as soon as possible.
7879 When enabled, it can occur that events get processed by the Riemann server
7880 close to or after their expiration time. Tune the B<TTLFactor> and
7881 B<BatchMaxSize> settings according to the amount of values collected, if this
7882 is an issue.
7884 Defaults to true
7886 =item B<BatchMaxSize> I<size>
7888 Maximum payload size for a riemann packet. Defaults to 8192
7890 =item B<StoreRates> B<true>|B<false>
7892 If set to B<true> (the default), convert counter values to rates. If set to
7893 B<false> counter values are stored as is, i.e. as an increasing integer number.
7895 This will be reflected in the C<ds_type> tag: If B<StoreRates> is enabled,
7896 converted values will have "rate" appended to the data source type, e.g.
7897 C<ds_type:derive:rate>.
7899 =item B<AlwaysAppendDS> B<false>|B<true>
7901 If set to B<true>, append the name of the I<Data Source> (DS) to the
7902 "service", i.e. the field that, together with the "host" field, uniquely
7903 identifies a metric in I<Riemann>. If set to B<false> (the default), this is
7904 only done when there is more than one DS.
7906 =item B<TTLFactor> I<Factor>
7908 I<Riemann> events have a I<Time to Live> (TTL) which specifies how long each
7909 event is considered active. I<collectd> populates this field based on the
7910 metrics interval setting. This setting controls the factor with which the
7911 interval is multiplied to set the TTL. The default value is B<2.0>. Unless you
7912 know exactly what you're doing, you should only increase this setting from its
7913 default value.
7915 =item B<Notifications> B<false>|B<true>
7917 If set to B<true>, create riemann events for notifications. This is B<true>
7918 by default. When processing thresholds from write_riemann, it might prove
7919 useful to avoid getting notification events.
7921 =item B<CheckThresholds> B<false>|B<true>
7923 If set to B<true>, attach state to events based on thresholds defined
7924 in the B<Threshold> plugin. Defaults to B<false>.
7926 =item B<EventServicePrefix> I<String>
7928 Add the given string as a prefix to the event service name.
7929 If B<EventServicePrefix> not set or set to an empty string (""),
7930 no prefix will be used.
7932 =back
7934 =item B<Tag> I<String>
7936 Add the given string as an additional tag to the metric being sent to
7937 I<Riemann>.
7939 =item B<Attribute> I<String> I<String>
7941 Consider the two given strings to be the key and value of an additional
7942 attribute for each metric being sent out to I<Riemann>.
7944 =back
7946 =head2 Plugin C<write_sensu>
7948 The I<write_sensu plugin> will send values to I<Sensu>, a powerful stream
7949 aggregation and monitoring system. The plugin sends I<JSON> encoded data to
7950 a local I<Sensu> client using a TCP socket.
7952 At the moment, the I<write_sensu plugin> does not send over a collectd_host
7953 parameter so it is not possible to use one collectd instance as a gateway for
7954 others. Each collectd host must pair with one I<Sensu> client.
7956 Synopsis:
7958 <Plugin "write_sensu">
7959 <Node "example">
7960 Host "localhost"
7961 Port "3030"
7962 StoreRates true
7963 AlwaysAppendDS false
7964 MetricHandler "influx"
7965 MetricHandler "default"
7966 NotificationHandler "flapjack"
7967 NotificationHandler "howling_monkey"
7968 Notifications true
7969 </Node>
7970 Tag "foobar"
7971 Attribute "foo" "bar"
7972 </Plugin>
7974 The following options are understood by the I<write_sensu plugin>:
7976 =over 4
7978 =item E<lt>B<Node> I<Name>E<gt>
7980 The plugin's configuration consists of one or more B<Node> blocks. Each block
7981 is given a unique I<Name> and specifies one connection to an instance of
7982 I<Sensu>. Inside the B<Node> block, the following per-connection options are
7983 understood:
7985 =over 4
7987 =item B<Host> I<Address>
7989 Hostname or address to connect to. Defaults to C<localhost>.
7991 =item B<Port> I<Service>
7993 Service name or port number to connect to. Defaults to C<3030>.
7995 =item B<StoreRates> B<true>|B<false>
7997 If set to B<true> (the default), convert counter values to rates. If set to
7998 B<false> counter values are stored as is, i.e. as an increasing integer number.
8000 This will be reflected in the C<collectd_data_source_type> tag: If
8001 B<StoreRates> is enabled, converted values will have "rate" appended to the
8002 data source type, e.g. C<collectd_data_source_type:derive:rate>.
8004 =item B<AlwaysAppendDS> B<false>|B<true>
8006 If set the B<true>, append the name of the I<Data Source> (DS) to the
8007 "service", i.e. the field that, together with the "host" field, uniquely
8008 identifies a metric in I<Sensu>. If set to B<false> (the default), this is
8009 only done when there is more than one DS.
8011 =item B<Notifications> B<false>|B<true>
8013 If set to B<true>, create I<Sensu> events for notifications. This is B<false>
8014 by default. At least one of B<Notifications> or B<Metrics> should be enabled.
8016 =item B<Metrics> B<false>|B<true>
8018 If set to B<true>, create I<Sensu> events for metrics. This is B<false>
8019 by default. At least one of B<Notifications> or B<Metrics> should be enabled.
8022 =item B<Separator> I<String>
8024 Sets the separator for I<Sensu> metrics name or checks. Defaults to "/".
8026 =item B<MetricHandler> I<String>
8028 Add a handler that will be set when metrics are sent to I<Sensu>. You can add
8029 several of them, one per line. Defaults to no handler.
8031 =item B<NotificationHandler> I<String>
8033 Add a handler that will be set when notifications are sent to I<Sensu>. You can
8034 add several of them, one per line. Defaults to no handler.
8036 =item B<EventServicePrefix> I<String>
8038 Add the given string as a prefix to the event service name.
8039 If B<EventServicePrefix> not set or set to an empty string (""),
8040 no prefix will be used.
8042 =back
8044 =item B<Tag> I<String>
8046 Add the given string as an additional tag to the metric being sent to
8047 I<Sensu>.
8049 =item B<Attribute> I<String> I<String>
8051 Consider the two given strings to be the key and value of an additional
8052 attribute for each metric being sent out to I<Sensu>.
8054 =back
8056 =head2 Plugin C<zookeeper>
8058 The I<zookeeper plugin> will collect statistics from a I<Zookeeper> server
8059 using the mntr command. It requires Zookeeper 3.4.0+ and access to the
8060 client port.
8062 B<Synopsis:>
8064 <Plugin "zookeeper">
8065 Host "127.0.0.1"
8066 Port "2181"
8067 </Plugin>
8069 =over 4
8071 =item B<Host> I<Address>
8073 Hostname or address to connect to. Defaults to C<localhost>.
8075 =item B<Port> I<Service>
8077 Service name or port number to connect to. Defaults to C<2181>.
8079 =back
8081 =head1 THRESHOLD CONFIGURATION
8083 Starting with version C<4.3.0> collectd has support for B<monitoring>. By that
8084 we mean that the values are not only stored or sent somewhere, but that they
8085 are judged and, if a problem is recognized, acted upon. The only action
8086 collectd takes itself is to generate and dispatch a "notification". Plugins can
8087 register to receive notifications and perform appropriate further actions.
8089 Since systems and what you expect them to do differ a lot, you can configure
8090 B<thresholds> for your values freely. This gives you a lot of flexibility but
8091 also a lot of responsibility.
8093 Every time a value is out of range a notification is dispatched. This means
8094 that the idle percentage of your CPU needs to be less then the configured
8095 threshold only once for a notification to be generated. There's no such thing
8096 as a moving average or similar - at least not now.
8098 Also, all values that match a threshold are considered to be relevant or
8099 "interesting". As a consequence collectd will issue a notification if they are
8100 not received for B<Timeout> iterations. The B<Timeout> configuration option is
8101 explained in section L<"GLOBAL OPTIONS">. If, for example, B<Timeout> is set to
8102 "2" (the default) and some hosts sends it's CPU statistics to the server every
8103 60 seconds, a notification will be dispatched after about 120 seconds. It may
8104 take a little longer because the timeout is checked only once each B<Interval>
8105 on the server.
8107 When a value comes within range again or is received after it was missing, an
8108 "OKAY-notification" is dispatched.
8110 Here is a configuration example to get you started. Read below for more
8111 information.
8113 <Plugin threshold>
8114 <Type "foo">
8115 WarningMin 0.00
8116 WarningMax 1000.00
8117 FailureMin 0.00
8118 FailureMax 1200.00
8119 Invert false
8120 Instance "bar"
8121 </Type>
8123 <Plugin "interface">
8124 Instance "eth0"
8125 <Type "if_octets">
8126 FailureMax 10000000
8127 DataSource "rx"
8128 </Type>
8129 </Plugin>
8131 <Host "hostname">
8132 <Type "cpu">
8133 Instance "idle"
8134 FailureMin 10
8135 </Type>
8137 <Plugin "memory">
8138 <Type "memory">
8139 Instance "cached"
8140 WarningMin 100000000
8141 </Type>
8142 </Plugin>
8143 </Host>
8144 </Plugin>
8146 There are basically two types of configuration statements: The C<Host>,
8147 C<Plugin>, and C<Type> blocks select the value for which a threshold should be
8148 configured. The C<Plugin> and C<Type> blocks may be specified further using the
8149 C<Instance> option. You can combine the block by nesting the blocks, though
8150 they must be nested in the above order, i.E<nbsp>e. C<Host> may contain either
8151 C<Plugin> and C<Type> blocks, C<Plugin> may only contain C<Type> blocks and
8152 C<Type> may not contain other blocks. If multiple blocks apply to the same
8153 value the most specific block is used.
8155 The other statements specify the threshold to configure. They B<must> be
8156 included in a C<Type> block. Currently the following statements are recognized:
8158 =over 4
8160 =item B<FailureMax> I<Value>
8162 =item B<WarningMax> I<Value>
8164 Sets the upper bound of acceptable values. If unset defaults to positive
8165 infinity. If a value is greater than B<FailureMax> a B<FAILURE> notification
8166 will be created. If the value is greater than B<WarningMax> but less than (or
8167 equal to) B<FailureMax> a B<WARNING> notification will be created.
8169 =item B<FailureMin> I<Value>
8171 =item B<WarningMin> I<Value>
8173 Sets the lower bound of acceptable values. If unset defaults to negative
8174 infinity. If a value is less than B<FailureMin> a B<FAILURE> notification will
8175 be created. If the value is less than B<WarningMin> but greater than (or equal
8176 to) B<FailureMin> a B<WARNING> notification will be created.
8178 =item B<DataSource> I<DSName>
8180 Some data sets have more than one "data source". Interesting examples are the
8181 C<if_octets> data set, which has received (C<rx>) and sent (C<tx>) bytes and
8182 the C<disk_ops> data set, which holds C<read> and C<write> operations. The
8183 system load data set, C<load>, even has three data sources: C<shortterm>,
8184 C<midterm>, and C<longterm>.
8186 Normally, all data sources are checked against a configured threshold. If this
8187 is undesirable, or if you want to specify different limits for each data
8188 source, you can use the B<DataSource> option to have a threshold apply only to
8189 one data source.
8191 =item B<Invert> B<true>|B<false>
8193 If set to B<true> the range of acceptable values is inverted, i.E<nbsp>e.
8194 values between B<FailureMin> and B<FailureMax> (B<WarningMin> and
8195 B<WarningMax>) are not okay. Defaults to B<false>.
8197 =item B<Persist> B<true>|B<false>
8199 Sets how often notifications are generated. If set to B<true> one notification
8200 will be generated for each value that is out of the acceptable range. If set to
8201 B<false> (the default) then a notification is only generated if a value is out
8202 of range but the previous value was okay.
8204 This applies to missing values, too: If set to B<true> a notification about a
8205 missing value is generated once every B<Interval> seconds. If set to B<false>
8206 only one such notification is generated until the value appears again.
8208 =item B<Percentage> B<true>|B<false>
8210 If set to B<true>, the minimum and maximum values given are interpreted as
8211 percentage value, relative to the other data sources. This is helpful for
8212 example for the "df" type, where you may want to issue a warning when less than
8213 5E<nbsp>% of the total space is available. Defaults to B<false>.
8215 =item B<Hits> I<Number>
8217 Delay creating the notification until the threshold has been passed I<Number>
8218 times. When a notification has been generated, or when a subsequent value is
8219 inside the threshold, the counter is reset. If, for example, a value is
8220 collected once every 10E<nbsp>seconds and B<Hits> is set to 3, a notification
8221 will be dispatched at most once every 30E<nbsp>seconds.
8223 This is useful when short bursts are not a problem. If, for example, 100% CPU
8224 usage for up to a minute is normal (and data is collected every
8225 10E<nbsp>seconds), you could set B<Hits> to B<6> to account for this.
8227 =item B<Hysteresis> I<Number>
8229 When set to non-zero, a hysteresis value is applied when checking minimum and
8230 maximum bounds. This is useful for values that increase slowly and fluctuate a
8231 bit while doing so. When these values come close to the threshold, they may
8232 "flap", i.e. switch between failure / warning case and okay case repeatedly.
8234 If, for example, the threshold is configures as
8236 WarningMax 100.0
8237 Hysteresis 1.0
8239 then a I<Warning> notification is created when the value exceeds I<101> and the
8240 corresponding I<Okay> notification is only created once the value falls below
8241 I<99>, thus avoiding the "flapping".
8243 =back
8245 =head1 FILTER CONFIGURATION
8247 Starting with collectd 4.6 there is a powerful filtering infrastructure
8248 implemented in the daemon. The concept has mostly been copied from
8249 I<ip_tables>, the packet filter infrastructure for Linux. We'll use a similar
8250 terminology, so that users that are familiar with iptables feel right at home.
8252 =head2 Terminology
8254 The following are the terms used in the remainder of the filter configuration
8255 documentation. For an ASCII-art schema of the mechanism, see
8256 L<"General structure"> below.
8258 =over 4
8260 =item B<Match>
8262 A I<match> is a criteria to select specific values. Examples are, of course, the
8263 name of the value or it's current value.
8265 Matches are implemented in plugins which you have to load prior to using the
8266 match. The name of such plugins starts with the "match_" prefix.
8268 =item B<Target>
8270 A I<target> is some action that is to be performed with data. Such actions
8271 could, for example, be to change part of the value's identifier or to ignore
8272 the value completely.
8274 Some of these targets are built into the daemon, see L<"Built-in targets">
8275 below. Other targets are implemented in plugins which you have to load prior to
8276 using the target. The name of such plugins starts with the "target_" prefix.
8278 =item B<Rule>
8280 The combination of any number of matches and at least one target is called a
8281 I<rule>. The target actions will be performed for all values for which B<all>
8282 matches apply. If the rule does not have any matches associated with it, the
8283 target action will be performed for all values.
8285 =item B<Chain>
8287 A I<chain> is a list of rules and possibly default targets. The rules are tried
8288 in order and if one matches, the associated target will be called. If a value
8289 is handled by a rule, it depends on the target whether or not any subsequent
8290 rules are considered or if traversal of the chain is aborted, see
8291 L<"Flow control"> below. After all rules have been checked, the default targets
8292 will be executed.
8294 =back
8296 =head2 General structure
8298 The following shows the resulting structure:
8300 +---------+
8301 ! Chain !
8302 +---------+
8303 !
8304 V
8305 +---------+ +---------+ +---------+ +---------+
8306 ! Rule !->! Match !->! Match !->! Target !
8307 +---------+ +---------+ +---------+ +---------+
8308 !
8309 V
8310 +---------+ +---------+ +---------+
8311 ! Rule !->! Target !->! Target !
8312 +---------+ +---------+ +---------+
8313 !
8314 V
8315 :
8316 :
8317 !
8318 V
8319 +---------+ +---------+ +---------+
8320 ! Rule !->! Match !->! Target !
8321 +---------+ +---------+ +---------+
8322 !
8323 V
8324 +---------+
8325 ! Default !
8326 ! Target !
8327 +---------+
8329 =head2 Flow control
8331 There are four ways to control which way a value takes through the filter
8332 mechanism:
8334 =over 4
8336 =item B<jump>
8338 The built-in B<jump> target can be used to "call" another chain, i.E<nbsp>e.
8339 process the value with another chain. When the called chain finishes, usually
8340 the next target or rule after the jump is executed.
8342 =item B<stop>
8344 The stop condition, signaled for example by the built-in target B<stop>, causes
8345 all processing of the value to be stopped immediately.
8347 =item B<return>
8349 Causes processing in the current chain to be aborted, but processing of the
8350 value generally will continue. This means that if the chain was called via
8351 B<Jump>, the next target or rule after the jump will be executed. If the chain
8352 was not called by another chain, control will be returned to the daemon and it
8353 may pass the value to another chain.
8355 =item B<continue>
8357 Most targets will signal the B<continue> condition, meaning that processing
8358 should continue normally. There is no special built-in target for this
8359 condition.
8361 =back
8363 =head2 Synopsis
8365 The configuration reflects this structure directly:
8367 PostCacheChain "PostCache"
8368 <Chain "PostCache">
8369 <Rule "ignore_mysql_show">
8370 <Match "regex">
8371 Plugin "^mysql$"
8372 Type "^mysql_command$"
8373 TypeInstance "^show_"
8374 </Match>
8375 <Target "stop">
8376 </Target>
8377 </Rule>
8378 <Target "write">
8379 Plugin "rrdtool"
8380 </Target>
8381 </Chain>
8383 The above configuration example will ignore all values where the plugin field
8384 is "mysql", the type is "mysql_command" and the type instance begins with
8385 "show_". All other values will be sent to the C<rrdtool> write plugin via the
8386 default target of the chain. Since this chain is run after the value has been
8387 added to the cache, the MySQL C<show_*> command statistics will be available
8388 via the C<unixsock> plugin.
8390 =head2 List of configuration options
8392 =over 4
8394 =item B<PreCacheChain> I<ChainName>
8396 =item B<PostCacheChain> I<ChainName>
8398 Configure the name of the "pre-cache chain" and the "post-cache chain". The
8399 argument is the name of a I<chain> that should be executed before and/or after
8400 the values have been added to the cache.
8402 To understand the implications, it's important you know what is going on inside
8403 I<collectd>. The following diagram shows how values are passed from the
8404 read-plugins to the write-plugins:
8406 +---------------+
8407 ! Read-Plugin !
8408 +-------+-------+
8409 !
8410 + - - - - V - - - - +
8411 : +---------------+ :
8412 : ! Pre-Cache ! :
8413 : ! Chain ! :
8414 : +-------+-------+ :
8415 : ! :
8416 : V :
8417 : +-------+-------+ : +---------------+
8418 : ! Cache !--->! Value Cache !
8419 : ! insert ! : +---+---+-------+
8420 : +-------+-------+ : ! !
8421 : ! ,------------' !
8422 : V V : V
8423 : +-------+---+---+ : +-------+-------+
8424 : ! Post-Cache +--->! Write-Plugins !
8425 : ! Chain ! : +---------------+
8426 : +---------------+ :
8427 : :
8428 : dispatch values :
8429 + - - - - - - - - - +
8431 After the values are passed from the "read" plugins to the dispatch functions,
8432 the pre-cache chain is run first. The values are added to the internal cache
8433 afterwards. The post-cache chain is run after the values have been added to the
8434 cache. So why is it such a huge deal if chains are run before or after the
8435 values have been added to this cache?
8437 Targets that change the identifier of a value list should be executed before
8438 the values are added to the cache, so that the name in the cache matches the
8439 name that is used in the "write" plugins. The C<unixsock> plugin, too, uses
8440 this cache to receive a list of all available values. If you change the
8441 identifier after the value list has been added to the cache, this may easily
8442 lead to confusion, but it's not forbidden of course.
8444 The cache is also used to convert counter values to rates. These rates are, for
8445 example, used by the C<value> match (see below). If you use the rate stored in
8446 the cache B<before> the new value is added, you will use the old, B<previous>
8447 rate. Write plugins may use this rate, too, see the C<csv> plugin, for example.
8448 The C<unixsock> plugin uses these rates too, to implement the C<GETVAL>
8449 command.
8451 Last but not last, the B<stop> target makes a difference: If the pre-cache
8452 chain returns the stop condition, the value will not be added to the cache and
8453 the post-cache chain will not be run.
8455 =item B<Chain> I<Name>
8457 Adds a new chain with a certain name. This name can be used to refer to a
8458 specific chain, for example to jump to it.
8460 Within the B<Chain> block, there can be B<Rule> blocks and B<Target> blocks.
8462 =item B<Rule> [I<Name>]
8464 Adds a new rule to the current chain. The name of the rule is optional and
8465 currently has no meaning for the daemon.
8467 Within the B<Rule> block, there may be any number of B<Match> blocks and there
8468 must be at least one B<Target> block.
8470 =item B<Match> I<Name>
8472 Adds a match to a B<Rule> block. The name specifies what kind of match should
8473 be performed. Available matches depend on the plugins that have been loaded.
8475 The arguments inside the B<Match> block are passed to the plugin implementing
8476 the match, so which arguments are valid here depends on the plugin being used.
8477 If you do not need any to pass any arguments to a match, you can use the
8478 shorter syntax:
8480 Match "foobar"
8482 Which is equivalent to:
8484 <Match "foobar">
8485 </Match>
8487 =item B<Target> I<Name>
8489 Add a target to a rule or a default target to a chain. The name specifies what
8490 kind of target is to be added. Which targets are available depends on the
8491 plugins being loaded.
8493 The arguments inside the B<Target> block are passed to the plugin implementing
8494 the target, so which arguments are valid here depends on the plugin being used.
8495 If you do not need any to pass any arguments to a target, you can use the
8496 shorter syntax:
8498 Target "stop"
8500 This is the same as writing:
8502 <Target "stop">
8503 </Target>
8505 =back
8507 =head2 Built-in targets
8509 The following targets are built into the core daemon and therefore need no
8510 plugins to be loaded:
8512 =over 4
8514 =item B<return>
8516 Signals the "return" condition, see the L<"Flow control"> section above. This
8517 causes the current chain to stop processing the value and returns control to
8518 the calling chain. The calling chain will continue processing targets and rules
8519 just after the B<jump> target (see below). This is very similar to the
8520 B<RETURN> target of iptables, see L<iptables(8)>.
8522 This target does not have any options.
8524 Example:
8526 Target "return"
8528 =item B<stop>
8530 Signals the "stop" condition, see the L<"Flow control"> section above. This
8531 causes processing of the value to be aborted immediately. This is similar to
8532 the B<DROP> target of iptables, see L<iptables(8)>.
8534 This target does not have any options.
8536 Example:
8538 Target "stop"
8540 =item B<write>
8542 Sends the value to "write" plugins.
8544 Available options:
8546 =over 4
8548 =item B<Plugin> I<Name>
8550 Name of the write plugin to which the data should be sent. This option may be
8551 given multiple times to send the data to more than one write plugin. If the
8552 plugin supports multiple instances, the plugin's instance(s) must also be
8553 specified.
8555 =back
8557 If no plugin is explicitly specified, the values will be sent to all available
8558 write plugins.
8560 Single-instance plugin example:
8562 <Target "write">
8563 Plugin "rrdtool"
8564 </Target>
8566 Multi-instance plugin example:
8568 <Plugin "write_graphite">
8569 <Node "foo">
8570 ...
8571 </Node>
8572 <Node "bar">
8573 ...
8574 </Node>
8575 </Plugin>
8576 ...
8577 <Target "write">
8578 Plugin "write_graphite/foo"
8579 </Target>
8581 =item B<jump>
8583 Starts processing the rules of another chain, see L<"Flow control"> above. If
8584 the end of that chain is reached, or a stop condition is encountered,
8585 processing will continue right after the B<jump> target, i.E<nbsp>e. with the
8586 next target or the next rule. This is similar to the B<-j> command line option
8587 of iptables, see L<iptables(8)>.
8589 Available options:
8591 =over 4
8593 =item B<Chain> I<Name>
8595 Jumps to the chain I<Name>. This argument is required and may appear only once.
8597 =back
8599 Example:
8601 <Target "jump">
8602 Chain "foobar"
8603 </Target>
8605 =back
8607 =head2 Available matches
8609 =over 4
8611 =item B<regex>
8613 Matches a value using regular expressions.
8615 Available options:
8617 =over 4
8619 =item B<Host> I<Regex>
8621 =item B<Plugin> I<Regex>
8623 =item B<PluginInstance> I<Regex>
8625 =item B<Type> I<Regex>
8627 =item B<TypeInstance> I<Regex>
8629 Match values where the given regular expressions match the various fields of
8630 the identifier of a value. If multiple regular expressions are given, B<all>
8631 regexen must match for a value to match.
8633 =item B<Invert> B<false>|B<true>
8635 When set to B<true>, the result of the match is inverted, i.e. all value lists
8636 where all regular expressions apply are not matched, all other value lists are
8637 matched. Defaults to B<false>.
8639 =back
8641 Example:
8643 <Match "regex">
8644 Host "customer[0-9]+"
8645 Plugin "^foobar$"
8646 </Match>
8648 =item B<timediff>
8650 Matches values that have a time which differs from the time on the server.
8652 This match is mainly intended for servers that receive values over the
8653 C<network> plugin and write them to disk using the C<rrdtool> plugin. RRDtool
8654 is very sensitive to the timestamp used when updating the RRD files. In
8655 particular, the time must be ever increasing. If a misbehaving client sends one
8656 packet with a timestamp far in the future, all further packets with a correct
8657 time will be ignored because of that one packet. What's worse, such corrupted
8658 RRD files are hard to fix.
8660 This match lets one match all values B<outside> a specified time range
8661 (relative to the server's time), so you can use the B<stop> target (see below)
8662 to ignore the value, for example.
8664 Available options:
8666 =over 4
8668 =item B<Future> I<Seconds>
8670 Matches all values that are I<ahead> of the server's time by I<Seconds> or more
8671 seconds. Set to zero for no limit. Either B<Future> or B<Past> must be
8672 non-zero.
8674 =item B<Past> I<Seconds>
8676 Matches all values that are I<behind> of the server's time by I<Seconds> or
8677 more seconds. Set to zero for no limit. Either B<Future> or B<Past> must be
8678 non-zero.
8680 =back
8682 Example:
8684 <Match "timediff">
8685 Future 300
8686 Past 3600
8687 </Match>
8689 This example matches all values that are five minutes or more ahead of the
8690 server or one hour (or more) lagging behind.
8692 =item B<value>
8694 Matches the actual value of data sources against given minimumE<nbsp>/ maximum
8695 values. If a data-set consists of more than one data-source, all data-sources
8696 must match the specified ranges for a positive match.
8698 Available options:
8700 =over 4
8702 =item B<Min> I<Value>
8704 Sets the smallest value which still results in a match. If unset, behaves like
8705 negative infinity.
8707 =item B<Max> I<Value>
8709 Sets the largest value which still results in a match. If unset, behaves like
8710 positive infinity.
8712 =item B<Invert> B<true>|B<false>
8714 Inverts the selection. If the B<Min> and B<Max> settings result in a match,
8715 no-match is returned and vice versa. Please note that the B<Invert> setting
8716 only effects how B<Min> and B<Max> are applied to a specific value. Especially
8717 the B<DataSource> and B<Satisfy> settings (see below) are not inverted.
8719 =item B<DataSource> I<DSName> [I<DSName> ...]
8721 Select one or more of the data sources. If no data source is configured, all
8722 data sources will be checked. If the type handled by the match does not have a
8723 data source of the specified name(s), this will always result in no match
8724 (independent of the B<Invert> setting).
8726 =item B<Satisfy> B<Any>|B<All>
8728 Specifies how checking with several data sources is performed. If set to
8729 B<Any>, the match succeeds if one of the data sources is in the configured
8730 range. If set to B<All> the match only succeeds if all data sources are within
8731 the configured range. Default is B<All>.
8733 Usually B<All> is used for positive matches, B<Any> is used for negative
8734 matches. This means that with B<All> you usually check that all values are in a
8735 "good" range, while with B<Any> you check if any value is within a "bad" range
8736 (or outside the "good" range).
8738 =back
8740 Either B<Min> or B<Max>, but not both, may be unset.
8742 Example:
8744 # Match all values smaller than or equal to 100. Matches only if all data
8745 # sources are below 100.
8746 <Match "value">
8747 Max 100
8748 Satisfy "All"
8749 </Match>
8751 # Match if the value of any data source is outside the range of 0 - 100.
8752 <Match "value">
8753 Min 0
8754 Max 100
8755 Invert true
8756 Satisfy "Any"
8757 </Match>
8759 =item B<empty_counter>
8761 Matches all values with one or more data sources of type B<COUNTER> and where
8762 all counter values are zero. These counters usually I<never> increased since
8763 they started existing (and are therefore uninteresting), or got reset recently
8764 or overflowed and you had really, I<really> bad luck.
8766 Please keep in mind that ignoring such counters can result in confusing
8767 behavior: Counters which hardly ever increase will be zero for long periods of
8768 time. If the counter is reset for some reason (machine or service restarted,
8769 usually), the graph will be empty (NAN) for a long time. People may not
8770 understand why.
8772 =item B<hashed>
8774 Calculates a hash value of the host name and matches values according to that
8775 hash value. This makes it possible to divide all hosts into groups and match
8776 only values that are in a specific group. The intended use is in load
8777 balancing, where you want to handle only part of all data and leave the rest
8778 for other servers.
8780 The hashing function used tries to distribute the hosts evenly. First, it
8781 calculates a 32E<nbsp>bit hash value using the characters of the hostname:
8783 hash_value = 0;
8784 for (i = 0; host[i] != 0; i++)
8785 hash_value = (hash_value * 251) + host[i];
8787 The constant 251 is a prime number which is supposed to make this hash value
8788 more random. The code then checks the group for this host according to the
8789 I<Total> and I<Match> arguments:
8791 if ((hash_value % Total) == Match)
8792 matches;
8793 else
8794 does not match;
8796 Please note that when you set I<Total> to two (i.E<nbsp>e. you have only two
8797 groups), then the least significant bit of the hash value will be the XOR of
8798 all least significant bits in the host name. One consequence is that when you
8799 have two hosts, "server0.example.com" and "server1.example.com", where the host
8800 name differs in one digit only and the digits differ by one, those hosts will
8801 never end up in the same group.
8803 Available options:
8805 =over 4
8807 =item B<Match> I<Match> I<Total>
8809 Divide the data into I<Total> groups and match all hosts in group I<Match> as
8810 described above. The groups are numbered from zero, i.E<nbsp>e. I<Match> must
8811 be smaller than I<Total>. I<Total> must be at least one, although only values
8812 greater than one really do make any sense.
8814 You can repeat this option to match multiple groups, for example:
8816 Match 3 7
8817 Match 5 7
8819 The above config will divide the data into seven groups and match groups three
8820 and five. One use would be to keep every value on two hosts so that if one
8821 fails the missing data can later be reconstructed from the second host.
8823 =back
8825 Example:
8827 # Operate on the pre-cache chain, so that ignored values are not even in the
8828 # global cache.
8829 <Chain "PreCache">
8830 <Rule>
8831 <Match "hashed">
8832 # Divide all received hosts in seven groups and accept all hosts in
8833 # group three.
8834 Match 3 7
8835 </Match>
8836 # If matched: Return and continue.
8837 Target "return"
8838 </Rule>
8839 # If not matched: Return and stop.
8840 Target "stop"
8841 </Chain>
8843 =back
8845 =head2 Available targets
8847 =over 4
8849 =item B<notification>
8851 Creates and dispatches a notification.
8853 Available options:
8855 =over 4
8857 =item B<Message> I<String>
8859 This required option sets the message of the notification. The following
8860 placeholders will be replaced by an appropriate value:
8862 =over 4
8864 =item B<%{host}>
8866 =item B<%{plugin}>
8868 =item B<%{plugin_instance}>
8870 =item B<%{type}>
8872 =item B<%{type_instance}>
8874 These placeholders are replaced by the identifier field of the same name.
8876 =item B<%{ds:>I<name>B<}>
8878 These placeholders are replaced by a (hopefully) human readable representation
8879 of the current rate of this data source. If you changed the instance name
8880 (using the B<set> or B<replace> targets, see below), it may not be possible to
8881 convert counter values to rates.
8883 =back
8885 Please note that these placeholders are B<case sensitive>!
8887 =item B<Severity> B<"FAILURE">|B<"WARNING">|B<"OKAY">
8889 Sets the severity of the message. If omitted, the severity B<"WARNING"> is
8890 used.
8892 =back
8894 Example:
8896 <Target "notification">
8897 Message "Oops, the %{type_instance} temperature is currently %{ds:value}!"
8898 Severity "WARNING"
8899 </Target>
8901 =item B<replace>
8903 Replaces parts of the identifier using regular expressions.
8905 Available options:
8907 =over 4
8909 =item B<Host> I<Regex> I<Replacement>
8911 =item B<Plugin> I<Regex> I<Replacement>
8913 =item B<PluginInstance> I<Regex> I<Replacement>
8915 =item B<TypeInstance> I<Regex> I<Replacement>
8917 Match the appropriate field with the given regular expression I<Regex>. If the
8918 regular expression matches, that part that matches is replaced with
8919 I<Replacement>. If multiple places of the input buffer match a given regular
8920 expression, only the first occurrence will be replaced.
8922 You can specify each option multiple times to use multiple regular expressions
8923 one after another.
8925 =back
8927 Example:
8929 <Target "replace">
8930 # Replace "example.net" with "example.com"
8931 Host "\\<example.net\\>" "example.com"
8933 # Strip "www." from hostnames
8934 Host "\\<www\\." ""
8935 </Target>
8937 =item B<set>
8939 Sets part of the identifier of a value to a given string.
8941 Available options:
8943 =over 4
8945 =item B<Host> I<String>
8947 =item B<Plugin> I<String>
8949 =item B<PluginInstance> I<String>
8951 =item B<TypeInstance> I<String>
8953 Set the appropriate field to the given string. The strings for plugin instance
8954 and type instance may be empty, the strings for host and plugin may not be
8955 empty. It's currently not possible to set the type of a value this way.
8957 =back
8959 Example:
8961 <Target "set">
8962 PluginInstance "coretemp"
8963 TypeInstance "core3"
8964 </Target>
8966 =back
8968 =head2 Backwards compatibility
8970 If you use collectd with an old configuration, i.E<nbsp>e. one without a
8971 B<Chain> block, it will behave as it used to. This is equivalent to the
8972 following configuration:
8974 <Chain "PostCache">
8975 Target "write"
8976 </Chain>
8978 If you specify a B<PostCacheChain>, the B<write> target will not be added
8979 anywhere and you will have to make sure that it is called where appropriate. We
8980 suggest to add the above snippet as default target to your "PostCache" chain.
8982 =head2 Examples
8984 Ignore all values, where the hostname does not contain a dot, i.E<nbsp>e. can't
8985 be an FQDN.
8987 <Chain "PreCache">
8988 <Rule "no_fqdn">
8989 <Match "regex">
8990 Host "^[^\.]*$"
8991 </Match>
8992 Target "stop"
8993 </Rule>
8994 Target "write"
8995 </Chain>
8997 =head1 SEE ALSO
8999 L<collectd(1)>,
9000 L<collectd-exec(5)>,
9001 L<collectd-perl(5)>,
9002 L<collectd-unixsock(5)>,
9003 L<types.db(5)>,
9004 L<hddtemp(8)>,
9005 L<iptables(8)>,
9006 L<kstat(3KSTAT)>,
9007 L<mbmon(1)>,
9008 L<psql(1)>,
9009 L<regex(7)>,
9010 L<rrdtool(1)>,
9011 L<sensors(1)>
9013 =head1 AUTHOR
9015 Florian Forster E<lt>octo@collectd.orgE<gt>
9017 =cut